■When you configure VTP, you must configure a trunk port so that the switch can send and receive VTP advertisements to and from other switches in the domain. ■Before adding a VTP client switch to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. If you add a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain, it can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. See Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain for the procedure for verifying and resetting the VTP configuration revision number. ■VTP version 1 and VTP version 2 are not interoperable on switches in the same VTP domain. Do not enable VTP version 2 unless every switch in the VTP domain supports version 2. ■In VTP versions 1 and 2, when you configure extended-range VLANs on the switch, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode. VTP version 3 also supports creating extended-range VLANs in client or server mode. A VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) is a Layer 2 messaging protocol that maintains VLAN configuration consistency by managing the addition, deletion, and renaming of VLANs on a network-wide basis. VTP minimizes misconfigurations and configuration inconsistencies that can cause several problems, such as duplicate VLAN names, incorrect VLAN-type specifications, and security violations. Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VTP in your network. Using VTP, you can make configuration changes centrally on one or more switches and have those changes automatically communicated to all the other switches in the network. Without VTP, you cannot send information about VLANs to other switches. VTP is designed to work in an environment where updates are made on a single switch and are sent through VTP to other switches in the domain. It does not work well in a situation where multiple updates to the VLAN database occur simultaneously on switches in the same domain, which would result in an inconsistency in the VLAN database. The switch supports 1005 VLANs, but the number of configured features affects the usage of the switch hardware. If the switch is notified by VTP of a new VLAN and the switch is already using the maximum available hardware resources, it sends a message that there are not enough hardware resources available and shuts down the VLAN. The output of the show vlan user EXEC command shows the VLAN in a suspended state. VTP version 1 and version 2 support only normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005). VTP version 3 supports the entire VLAN range (VLANs 1 to 4096). Extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096) are supported only in VTP version 3. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured in the domain. A VTP domain (also called a VLAN management domain) consists of one switch or several interconnected switches under the same administrative responsibility sharing the same VTP domain name. A switch can be in only one VTP domain. You make global VLAN configuration changes for the domain. By default, the switch is in the VTP no-management-domain state until it receives an advertisement for a domain over a trunk link (a link that carries the traffic of multiple VLANs) or until you configure a domain name. Until the management domain name is specified or learned, you cannot create or modify VLANs on a VTP server, and VLAN information is not propagated over the network. If the switch receives a VTP advertisement over a trunk link, it inherits the management domain name and the VTP configuration revision number. The switch then ignores advertisements with a different domain name or an earlier configuration revision number. When you make a change to the VLAN configuration on a VTP server, the change is propagated to all switches in the VTP domain. VTP advertisements are sent over all IEEE trunk connections, including IEEE 802.1Q. VTP dynamically maps VLANs with unique names and internal index associates across multiple LAN types. Mapping eliminates excessive device administration required from network administrators. If you configure a switch for VTP transparent mode, you can create and modify VLANs, but the changes are not sent to other switches in the domain, and they affect only the individual switch. However, configuration changes made when the switch is in this mode are saved in the switch running configuration and can be saved to the switch startup configuration file. For domain name and password configuration guidelines, see VTP Configuration Guidelines.
■For VTP version 1 and version 2, if extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch, you cannot change VTP mode to client or server. You receive an error message, and the configuration is not allowed. VTP version 1 and version 2 do not propagate configuration information for extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096). You must manually configure these VLANs on each device. Note: For VTP version 1 and 2, before you create extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4096), you must set VTP mode to transparent by using the vtp mode transparent global configuration command. Save this configuration to the startup configuration so that the switch starts in VTP transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets and boots up in VTP server mode (the default). ■VTP version 3 supports extended-range VLANs. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2. ■If you configure the switch for VTP client mode, the switch does not create the VLAN database file (vlan.dat). If the switch is then powered off, it resets the VTP configuration to the default. To keep the VTP configuration with VTP client mode after the switch restarts, you must first configure the VTP domain name before the VTP mode. ■When a switch is in VTP server mode, you can change the VLAN configuration and have it propagated throughout the network. ■When a switch is in VTP client mode, you cannot change its VLAN configuration. The client switch receives VTP updates from a VTP server in the VTP domain and then modifies its configuration accordingly. ■When you configure the switch for VTP transparent mode, VTP is disabled on the switch. The switch does not send VTP updates and does not act on VTP updates received from other switches. However, a VTP transparent switch running VTP version 2 does forward received VTP advertisements on its trunk links. ■VTP off mode is the same as VTP transparent mode except that VTP advertisements are not forwarded. Caution: If all switches are operating in VTP client mode, do not configure a VTP domain name. If you do, it is impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Therefore, make sure you configure at least one switch as a VTP server. Each switch in the VTP domain sends periodic global configuration advertisements from each trunk port to a reserved multicast address. Neighboring switches receive these advertisements and update their VTP and VLAN configurations as necessary. VTP advertisements distribute this global domain information: ■VTP domain name ■VTP configuration revision number ■Update identity and update timestamp ■MD5 digest VLAN configuration, including maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for each VLAN ■Frame format VTP advertisements distribute this VLAN information for each configured VLAN: ■VLAN IDs (IEEE 802.1Q) ■VLAN name ■VLAN type ■VLAN state ■Additional VLAN configuration information specific to the VLAN type In VTP version 3, VTP advertisements also include the primary server ID, an instance number, and a start index. If you use VTP in your network, you must decide which version of VTP to use. By default, VTP operates in version 1. VTP version 2 supports these features that are not supported in version 1: ■Token Ring support—VTP version 2 supports Token Ring Bridge Relay Function (TrBRF) and Token Ring Concentrator Relay Function (TrCRF) VLANs. For more information about Token Ring VLANs, see Normal-Range VLANs. ■Unrecognized Type-Length-Value (TLV) support—A VTP server or client propagates configuration changes to its other trunks, even for TLVs it is not able to parse. The unrecognized TLV is saved in NVRAM when the switch is operating in VTP server mode. ■Version-Dependent Transparent Mode—In VTP version 1, a VTP transparent switch inspects VTP messages for the domain name and version and forwards a message only if the version and domain name match. Although VTP version 2 supports only one domain, a VTP version 2 transparent switch forwards a message only when the domain name matches. ■Consistency Checks—In VTP version 2, VLAN consistency checks (such as VLAN names and values) are performed only when you enter new information through the CLI or SNMP. Consistency checks are not performed when new information is obtained from a VTP message or when information is read from NVRAM. If the MD5 digest on a received VTP message is correct, its information is accepted. VTP version 3 supports these features that are not supported in version 1 or version 2: ■Enhanced authentication—You can configure the authentication as hidden or secret. When hidden, the secret key from the password string is saved in the VLAN database file, but it does not appear in plain text in the configuration. Instead, the key associated with the password is saved in hexadecimal format in the running configuration. You must reenter the password if you enter a takeover command in the domain. When you enter the secret keyword, you can directly configure the password secret key. ■Support for extended range VLAN (VLANs 1006 to 4096) database propagation. VTP versions 1 and 2 propagate only VLANs 1 to 1005. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to version 1 or 2. VTP pruning still applies only to VLANs 1 to 1005, and VLANs 1002 to 1005 are still reserved and cannot be modified. ■Support for any database in a domain. In addition to propagating VTP information, version 3 can propagate Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) protocol database information. A separate instance of the VTP protocol runs for each application that uses VTP. ■VTP primary server and VTP secondary servers. A VTP primary server updates the database information and sends updates that are honored by all devices in the system. A VTP secondary server can only back up the updated VTP configurations received from the primary server to its NVRAM. By default, all devices come up as secondary servers. You can enter the vtp primary privileged EXEC command to specify a primary server. Primary server status is only needed for database updates when the administrator issues a takeover message in the domain. You can have a working VTP domain without any primary servers. Primary server status is lost if the device reloads or domain parameters change, even when a password is configured on the switch. ■The option to turn VTP on or off on a per-trunk (per-port) basis. You can enable or disable VTP per port by entering the [ no ] vtp interface configuration command. When you disable VTP on trunking ports, all VTP instances for that port are disabled. You cannot set VTP to off for the MST database and on for the VLAN database on the same port. When you globally set VTP mode to off, it applies to all the trunking ports in the system. However, you can specify on or off on a per-VTP instance basis. For example, you can configure the switch as a VTP server for the VLAN database but with VTP off for the MST database. Follow these guidelines when deciding which VTP version to implement: ■All switches in a VTP domain must have the same domain name, but they do not need to run the same VTP version. ■A VTP version 2-capable switch can operate in the same VTP domain as a switch running VTP version 1 if version 2 is disabled on the version 2-capable switch (version 2 is disabled by default). ■If a switch running VTP version 1 but capable of running VTP version 2 receives VTP version 3 advertisements, it automatically moves to VTP version 2. ■If a switch running VTP version 3 is connected to a switch running VTP version 1, the VTP version 1 switch moves to VTP version 2, and the VTP version 3 switch sends scaled-down versions of the VTP packets so that the VTP version 2 switch can update its database. ■A switch running VTP version 3 cannot move to version 1 or 2 if it has extended VLANs. ■Do not enable VTP version 2 on a switch unless all of the switches in the same VTP domain are version-2-capable. When you enable version 2 on a switch, all of the version-2-capable switches in the domain enable version 2. If there is a version 1-only switch, it does not exchange VTP information with switches that have version 2 enabled. ■We recommend placing VTP version 1 and 2 switches at the edge of the network because they do not forward VTP version 3 advertisements. ■If there are TrBRF and TrCRF Token Ring networks in your environment, you must enable VTP version 2 or version 3 for Token Ring VLAN switching to function properly. To run Token Ring and Token Ring-Net, disable VTP version 2. ■VTP version 1 and version 2 do not propagate configuration information for extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096). You must configure these VLANs manually on each device. VTP version 3 supports extended-range VLANs. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured. ■When a VTP version 3 device trunk port receives messages from a VTP version 2 device, it sends a scaled-down version of the VLAN database on that particular trunk in VTP version 2 format. A VTP version 3 device does not send VTP version 2-formatted packets on a trunk unless it first receives VTP version 2 packets on that trunk port. ■When a VTP version 3 device detects a VTP version 2 device on a trunk port, it continues to send VTP version 3 packets, in addition to VTP version 2 packets, to allow both kinds of neighbors to coexist on the same trunk. ■A VTP version 3 device does not accept configuration information from a VTP version 2 or version 1 device. ■Two VTP version 3 regions can only communicate in transparent mode over a VTP version 1 or version 2 region. ■Devices that are only VTP version 1 capable cannot interoperate with VTP version 3 devices. ■VTP version 2 and version 3 are disabled by default. ■When you enable VTP version 2 on a switch, every VTP version 2-capable switch in the VTP domain enables version 2. To enable VTP version 3, you must manually configure it on each switch. ■With VTP versions 1 and 2, you can configure the version only on switches in VTP server or transparent mode. If a switch is running VTP version 3, you can change to version 2 when the switch is in client mode if no extended VLANs exist, no private VLANs exist, and no hidden password was configured. Caution: In VTP version 3, both the primary and secondary servers can exist on an instance in the domain. VTP pruning increases network available bandwidth by restricting flooded traffic to those trunk links that the traffic must use to reach the destination devices. Without VTP pruning, a switch floods broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast traffic across all trunk links within a VTP domain even though receiving switches might discard them. VTP pruning is disabled by default. VTP pruning blocks unneeded flooded traffic to VLANs on trunk ports that are included in the pruning-eligible list. Only VLANs included in the pruning-eligible list can be pruned. By default, VLANs 2 through 1001 are pruning eligible switch trunk ports. If the VLANs are configured as pruning-ineligible, the flooding continues. VTP pruning is supported in all VTP versions. Figure 33 shows a switched network without VTP pruning enabled. Port 1 on Switch A and Port 2 on Switch D are assigned to the Red VLAN. If a broadcast is sent from the host connected to Switch A, Switch A floods the broadcast and every switch in the network receives it, even though Switches C, E, and F have no ports in the Red VLAN. Figure 33 Flooding Traffic without VTP Pruning Figure 34 shows a switched network with VTP pruning enabled. The broadcast traffic from Switch A is not forwarded to Switches C, E, and F because traffic for the Red VLAN has been pruned on the links shown (Port 5 on Switch B and Port 4 on Switch D). Figure 34 Optimized Flooded Traffic with VTP Pruning With VTP versions 1 and 2, enabling VTP pruning on a VTP server enables pruning for the entire management domain. Making VLANs pruning-eligible or pruning-ineligible affects pruning eligibility for those VLANs on that trunk only (not on all switches in the VTP domain). In VTP version 3, you must manually enable pruning on each switch in the domain. See Enabling VTP Pruning. VTP pruning takes effect several seconds after you enable it. VTP pruning does not prune traffic from VLANs that are pruning-ineligible. VLAN 1 and VLANs 1002 to 1005 are always pruning-ineligible; traffic from these VLANs cannot be pruned. Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs higher than 1005) are also pruning-ineligible. VTP pruning is not designed to function in VTP transparent mode. If one or more switches in the network are in VTP transparent mode, you should do one of these: ■Turn off VTP pruning in the entire network. ■Turn off VTP pruning by making all VLANs on the trunk of the switch upstream to the VTP transparent switch pruning ineligible. To configure VTP pruning on an interface, use the switchport trunk pruning vlan interface configuration command. VTP pruning operates when an interface is trunking. You can set VLAN pruning-eligibility, whether or not VTP pruning is enabled for the VTP domain, whether or not any given VLAN exists, and whether or not the interface is currently trunking.
You use the vtp global configuration command to set the VTP password, the version, the VTP filename, the interface providing updated VTP information, the domain name, and the mode, and to disable or enable pruning. The VTP information is saved in the VTP VLAN database. When VTP mode is transparent, the VTP domain name and mode are also saved in the switch running configuration file, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. You must use this command if you want to save VTP mode as transparent if the switch resets. When you save VTP information in the switch startup configuration file and restart the switch, the configuration is selected as follows: ■If the VTP mode is transparent in both the startup configuration and the VLAN database and the VTP domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN database is ignored (cleared). The VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database. ■If the VTP mode or the domain name in the startup configuration do not match the VLAN database, the domain name and the VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information. When configuring VTP for the first time, you must always assign a domain name. You must configure all switches in the VTP domain with the same domain name. Switches in VTP transparent mode do not exchange VTP messages with other switches, and you do not need to configure a VTP domain name for them. Note: If NVRAM and DRAM storage is sufficient, all switches in a VTP domain should be in VTP server mode. Caution: Do not configure a VTP domain if all switches are operating in VTP client mode. If you configure the domain, it is impossible to make changes to the VLAN configuration of that domain. Make sure that you configure at least one switch in the VTP domain for VTP server mode. You can configure a password for the VTP domain, but it is not required. If you do configure a domain password, all domain switches must share the same password and you must configure the password on each switch in the management domain. Switches without a password or with the wrong password reject VTP advertisements. If you configure a VTP password for a domain, a switch that is booted without a VTP configuration does not accept VTP advertisements until you configure it with the correct password. After the configuration, the switch accepts the next VTP advertisement that uses the same password and domain name in the advertisement. If you are adding a new switch to an existing network with VTP capability, the new switch learns the domain name only after the applicable password has been configured on it. Caution: When you configure a VTP domain password, the management domain does not function properly if you do not assign a management domain password to each switch in the domain. Before adding a VTP client to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. With VTP versions 1 and 2, adding a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. With VTP version 3, the VLAN information is not erased. Before You Begin You should configure the VTP domain before configuring other VTP parameters.
Before You Begin Before adding a VTP client to a VTP domain, always verify that its VTP configuration revision number is lower than the configuration revision number of the other switches in the VTP domain. Switches in a VTP domain always use the VLAN configuration of the switch with the highest VTP configuration revision number. With VTP versions 1 and 2, adding a switch that has a revision number higher than the revision number in the VTP domain can erase all VLAN information from the VTP server and VTP domain. With VTP version 3, the VLAN information is not erased.
This example shows how to configure the switch as a VTP server with the domain name eng_group and the password mypassword : This example shows how to configure a hidden password and how it appears: This example shows how to configure a switch as the primary server for the VLAN database (the default) when a hidden or secret password was configured: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 2
The voice VLAN feature enables access ports to carry IP voice traffic from an IP phone. When the switch is connected to a Cisco 7960 IP Phone, the phone sends voice traffic with Layer 3 IP precedence and Layer 2 class of service (CoS) values, which are both set to 5 by default. Because the sound quality of a Cisco IP phone call can deteriorate if the data is unevenly sent, the switch supports quality of service (QoS) based on IEEE 802.1p CoS. QoS uses classification and scheduling to send network traffic from the switch in a predictable manner. Voice VLAN is referred to as an auxiliary VLAN in some switch documentation. The Cisco 7960 IP Phone is a configurable device, and you can configure it to forward traffic with an IEEE 802.1p priority. You can configure the switch to trust or override the traffic priority assigned by a Cisco IP phone. The Cisco IP phone contains an integrated three-port 10/100 switch as shown in Figure 35. The ports provide dedicated connections to these devices: ■Port 1 connects to the switch or other voice-over-IP (VoIP) device. ■Port 2 is an internal 10/100 interface that carries the IP phone traffic. ■Port 3 (access port) connects to a PC or other device. Figure 35 Cisco 7960 IP Phone Connected to a Switch You can configure an access port with an attached Cisco IP phone to use one VLAN for voice traffic and another VLAN for data traffic from a device attached to the phone. You can configure access ports on the switch to send Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets that instruct an attached phone to send voice traffic to the switch in any of these ways: ■In the voice VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value ■In the access VLAN tagged with a Layer 2 CoS priority value ■In the access VLAN, untagged (no Layer 2 CoS priority value) Note: In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default is 5 for voice traffic and 3 for voice control traffic). You can configure a port connected to the Cisco IP phone to send CDP packets to the phone to configure the way in which the phone sends voice traffic. The phone can carry voice traffic in IEEE 802.1Q frames for a specified voice VLAN with a Layer 2 CoS value. It can use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging to give voice traffic a higher priority and forward all voice traffic through the native (access) VLAN. The Cisco IP phone can also send untagged voice traffic or use its own configuration to send voice traffic in the access VLAN. In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 3 IP precedence value (the default is 5). The switch can also process tagged data traffic (traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frame types) from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP phone (see Figure 35). You can configure Layer 2 access ports on the switch to send CDP packets that instruct the attached phone to configure the phone access port in one of these modes: ■In trusted mode, all traffic received through the access port on the Cisco IP phone passes through the phone unchanged. ■In untrusted mode, all traffic in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames received through the access port on the Cisco IP phone receive a configured Layer 2 CoS value. The default Layer 2 CoS value is 0. Untrusted mode is the default. Note: Untagged traffic from the device attached to the Cisco IP phone passes through the phone unchanged, regardless of the trust state of the access port on the phone. The voice VLAN feature is disabled by default. When the voice VLAN feature is enabled, all untagged traffic is sent according to the default CoS priority of the port. The CoS value is not trusted for IEEE 802.1p or IEEE 802.1Q tagged traffic. ■Voice VLAN configuration is only supported on switch access ports; voice VLAN configuration is not supported on trunk ports. Note: Trunk ports can carry any number of voice VLANs, similar to regular VLANs. The configuration of voice VLANs is not required on trunk ports. ■The voice VLAN should be present and active on the switch for the IP phone to correctly communicate on the voice VLAN. Use the show vlan privileged EXEC command to see if the VLAN is present (listed in the display). ■Before you enable voice VLAN, we recommend that you enable QoS on the switch. If you use the auto-QoS feature, these settings are automatically configured. For more information, see Configuring QoS ■You must enable CDP on the switch port connected to the Cisco IP phone to send the configuration to the phone. (CDP is globally enabled by default on all switch interfaces.) ■The Port Fast feature is automatically enabled when voice VLAN is configured. When you disable voice VLAN, the Port Fast feature is not automatically disabled. ■If the Cisco IP phone and a device attached to the phone are in the same VLAN, they must be in the same IP subnet. These conditions indicate that they are in the same VLAN: –They both use IEEE 802.1p or untagged frames. –The Cisco IP phone uses IEEE 802.1p frames, and the device uses untagged frames. –The Cisco IP phone uses untagged frames, and the device uses IEEE 802.1p frames. –The Cisco IP phone uses IEEE 802.1Q frames, and the voice VLAN is the same as the access VLAN. ■The Cisco IP phone and a device attached to the phone cannot communicate if they are in the same VLAN and subnet but use different frame types because traffic in the same subnet is not routed (routing would eliminate the frame type difference). ■You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN. ■Voice VLAN ports can also be these port types: –Dynamic access port. –IEEE 802.1x authenticated port. See Configuring IEEE 802.1x Port-Based Authentication for more information. If you enable IEEE 802.1x on an access port on which a voice VLAN is configured and to which a Cisco IP phone is connected, the phone loses connectivity to the switch for up to 30 seconds. –Protected port. –A source or destination port for a SPAN or RSPAN session. –Secure port. When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, you must set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two plus the maximum number of secure addresses allowed on the access VLAN. When the port is connected to a Cisco IP phone, the phone requires up to two MAC addresses. The phone address is learned on the voice VLAN and might also be learned on the access VLAN. Connecting a PC to the phone requires additional MAC addresses. Because a Cisco 7960 IP Phone also supports a connection to a PC or other device, a port connecting the switch to a Cisco IP phone can carry mixed traffic. You can configure a port to decide how the Cisco IP phone carries voice traffic and data traffic. You can connect a PC or other data device to a Cisco IP phone port. To process tagged data traffic (in IEEE 802.1Q or IEEE 802.1p frames), you can configure the switch to send CDP packets to instruct the phone how to send data packets from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP phone. The PC can generate packets with an assigned CoS value. You can configure the phone to not change (trust) or to override (not trust) the priority of frames arriving on the phone port from connected devices.
This example shows how to configure a port connected to a Cisco IP phone to not change the priority of frames received from the PC or the attached device: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 3
This chapter defines the types of interfaces and describes how to configure them. ■Understanding Interface Types ■Using the Switch USB Port ■Using Interface Configuration Mode ■Configuring Ethernet Interfaces ■Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces ■Configuring the System MTU ■Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces This section describes the different types of interfaces supported by the switch with references to chapters that contain more detailed information about configuring these interface types. The rest of the chapter describes configuration procedures for physical interface characteristics. ■UNI, NNI, and ENI Port Types ■Port-Based VLANs ■Switch Ports ■Routed Ports ■Switch Virtual Interfaces ■EtherChannel Port Groups ■Power over Ethernet Ports ■Connecting Interfaces The switch supports user-network interfaces (UNIs), network node interfaces (NNIs), and enhanced network interfaces (ENIs). UNIs are typically connected to a host, such as a PC or a Cisco IP phone. NNIs are typically connected to a router or to another switch. ENIs have the same functionality as UNIs, but can be configured to support protocol control packets for Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP), Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), and EtherChannel Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) or Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP). By default, all ports are enabled as NNI. All ports on the switch can be configured as UNIs or ENIs. The default state for a UNI or ENI is administratively down to prevent unauthorized users from gaining access to other ports as you configure the switch. Traffic is not switched between these ports, and all arriving traffic at UNIs or ENIs must leave on NNIs to prevent a user from gaining access to another user’s private network. If it is appropriate for two or more UNIs or ENIs to exchange traffic within the switch, the UNIs and ENIs can be assigned to a community VLAN. See Configuring VLANs for instructions on how to configure community VLANs. Note: Even though the default state for a UNI or ENI is shutdown, entering the default interface interface-id command changes the port to the enabled state. The default status for an NNI is administratively up to allow a service provider remote access to the switch during initial configuration. A port can be reconfigured from UNI to NNI or ENI and the reverse. When a port is reconfigured as another interface type, it inherits all the characteristics of that interface type. When you reconfigure a UNI or ENI to be an NNI, you must enable the port before it becomes active. Changing the port type from UNI to ENI does not affect the administrative state of the port. If the UNI status is shut down, it remains shut down when reconfigured as an ENI; if the port is in a no shutdown state, it remains in the no shutdown state. At any time, all ports on the switch are either UNI, NNI, or ENI. A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, team, or application, without regard to the physical location of the users. Packets received on a port are forwarded only to ports that belong to the same VLAN as the receiving port. Network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 device to route traffic between the VLANs. VLAN partitions provide hard firewalls for traffic in the VLAN, and each VLAN has its own MAC address table. A VLAN comes into existence when a local port is associated with the VLAN ID or when a user creates te VLAN ID. To isolate VLANs of different customers in a service-provider network, the switch uses UNI-ENI VLANs. UNI-ENI VLANs isolate user network interfaces (UNIs) or enhanced network interfaces (ENIs) on the switch from UNIs or ENIs that belong to other customer VLANs. There are two types of UNI-ENI VLANs: ■UNI-ENI isolated VLAN—This is the default VLAN state for all VLANs created on the switch. Local switching does not occur among UNIs or ENIs on the switch that belong to the same UNI-ENI isolated VLAN. ■UNI-ENI community VLAN—Local switching is allowed among UNIs and ENIs on the switch that belong to the same UNI community VLAN. If UNIs or ENIs belong to the same customer, and you want to switch packets between the ports, you can configure the common VLAN as a UNI-ENI community VLAN. Note: Local switching takes place between ENIs and UNIs in the same community VLAN. Because you can enable spanning tree on ENIs, but not on UNIs, you should use caution when configuring ENIs and UNIs in the same community VLAN. UNIs are always in the forwarding state. To configure VLANs, use the vlan vlan-id global configuration command to enter VLAN configuration mode. The VLAN configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are saved in the VLAN database. Extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094) are not added to the VLAN database. VLAN configuration is saved in the switch running configuration, and you can save it in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Add ports to a VLAN by using the switchport interface configuration commands: ■Identify the interface. ■For a trunk port, set trunk characteristics, and if desired, define the VLANs to which it can belong. ■For an access port, set and define the VLAN to which it belongs. ■For a tunnel port, set and define the VLAN ID for the customer-specific VLAN tag. Switch ports are Layer 2 only interfaces associated with a physical port. Switch ports belong to one or more VLANs. A switch port can be an access port, a trunk port, a private-VLAN port, or a tunnel port. You can configure a port as an access port or trunk port. You configure a private VLAN port as a host or promiscuous port that belongs to a private-VLAN primary or secondary VLAN. (Only NNIs can be configured as promiscuous ports.) You must manually configure tunnel ports as part of an asymmetric link connected to an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port. Switch ports are used for managing the physical interface and associated Layer 2 protocols and do not handle routing or bridging. Configure switch ports by using the switchport interface configuration commands. Use the switchport command with no keywords to put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode. Note: When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration. An access port belongs to and carries the traffic of only one VLAN. Traffic is received and sent in native formats with no VLAN tagging. Traffic arriving on an access port is assumed to belong to the VLAN assigned to the port. If an access port receives an 802.1Q tagged packet, the packet is dropped, and the source address is not learned. 802.1x can also be used for VLAN assignment. Two types of access ports are supported: ■Static access ports are manually assigned to a VLAN. ■VLAN membership of dynamic access ports is learned through incoming packets. By default, a dynamic access port is a member of no VLAN, and forwarding to and from the port is enabled only when the VLAN membership of the port is discovered. UNIs begin forwarding packets as soon as they are enabled. Dynamic access ports on the switch are assigned to a VLAN by a VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS). Dynamic access ports for VMPS are only supported on UNIs and ENIs. An 802.1Q trunk port carries the traffic of multiple VLANs and by default is a member of all VLANs in the VLAN database. A trunk port supports simultaneous tagged and untagged traffic. An 802.1Q trunk port is assigned a default Port VLAN ID (PVID), and all untagged traffic travels on the port default PVID. All untagged traffic and tagged traffic with a NULL VLAN ID are assumed to belong to the port default PVID. A packet with a VLAN ID equal to the outgoing port default PVID is sent untagged. All other traffic is sent with a VLAN tag. Although by default a trunk port is a member of multiple VLANs, you can limit VLAN membership by configuring an allowed list of VLANs for each trunk port. The list of allowed VLANs does not affect any other port but the associated trunk port. By default, all possible VLANs (VLAN ID 1 to 4094) are in the allowed list. A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN only if the VLAN is in the enabled state. For more information about trunk ports, see Configuring VLANs Tunnel ports are used in 802.1Q tunneling to segregate the traffic of customers in a service-provider network from other customers who are using the same VLAN number. You configure an asymmetric link from a tunnel port on a service-provider edge switch to an 802.1Q trunk port on the customer switch. Packets entering the tunnel port on the edge switch, already IEEE 802.1Q-tagged with the customer VLANs, are encapsulated with another layer of an 802.1Q tag (called the metro tag), containing a VLAN ID unique in the service-provider network, for each customer. The double-tagged packets go through the service-provider network keeping the original customer VLANs separate from those of other customers. At the outbound interface, also a tunnel port, the metro tag is removed, and the original VLAN numbers from the customer network are retrieved. Note: IEEE 802.1Q tunneling is only supported when the switch is running the IP Services license. Tunnel ports cannot be trunk ports or access ports and must belong to a VLAN unique to each customer. A routed port is a physical port that acts like a port on a router; it does not have to be connected to a router. A routed port is not associated with a particular VLAN, as is an access port. A routed port behaves like a regular router interface, except that it does not support VLAN subinterfaces. Routed ports can be configured with a Layer 3 routing protocol. A routed port is a Layer 3 interface only and does not support Layer 2 protocols, such as STP. Configure routed ports by putting the interface into Layer 3 mode with the no switchport interface configuration command. Then assign an IP address to the port, enable routing, and assign routing protocol characteristics by using the ip routing and router protocol global configuration commands. Note: Entering a no switchport interface configuration command shuts down the interface and then re-enables it, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. When you put an interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost. The number of routed ports that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the interrelationship between this number and the number of other features being configured might impact CPU performance because of hardware limitations. See Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached. Note: For full Layer 3 routing, you must have the IP services image installed on the switch A switch virtual interface (SVI) represents a VLAN of switch ports as one interface to the routing or bridging function in the system. Only one SVI can be associated with a VLAN, but you need to configure an SVI for a VLAN only when you wish to route between VLANs or to provide IP host connectivity to the switch. By default, an SVI is created for the default VLAN (VLAN 1) to permit remote switch administration. Additional SVIs must be explicitly configured. Note: You cannot delete interface VLAN 1. SVIs provide IP host connectivity only to the system; in Layer 3 mode, you can configure routing across SVIs. Although the switch supports a total of 1005 VLANs (and SVIs), the interrelationship between the number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other features being configured might impact CPU performance because of hardware limitations. See Configuring Layer 3 Interfaces for information about what happens when hardware resource limitations are reached. SVIs are created the first time that you enter the vlan interface configuration command for a VLAN interface. The VLAN corresponds to the VLAN tag associated with data frames on an IEEE 802.1Q encapsulated trunk or the VLAN ID configured for an access port. Configure a VLAN interface for each VLAN for which you want to route traffic, and assign it an IP address. For more information, see Manually Assigning IP Information to SVIs. Note: When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port. SVIs support routing protocols. Note: Routed ports (or SVIs) are supported only when the IP services image is installed on the switch. EtherChannel port groups treat multiple switch ports as one switch port. These port groups act as a single logical port for high-bandwidth connections between switches or between switches and servers. An EtherChannel balances the traffic load across the links in the channel. If a link within the EtherChannel fails, traffic previously carried over the failed link changes to the remaining links. You can group multiple trunk ports into one logical trunk port, group multiple access ports into one logical access port, group multiple tunnel ports into one logical tunnel port, or group multiple routed ports into one logical routed port. Most protocols operate over either single ports or aggregated switch ports and do not recognize the physical ports within the port group. Exceptions are the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), and the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), which operate only on physical NNI or ENI ports. When you configure an EtherChannel, you create a port-channel logical interface and assign an interface to the EtherChannel. For Layer 3 interfaces, you manually create the logical interface by using the interface port-channel global configuration command. Then you manually assign an interface to the EtherChannel by using the channel-group interface configuration command. For Layer 2 interfaces, use the channel-group interface configuration command to dynamically create the port-channel logical interface. This command binds the physical and logical ports together. For more information, see Configuring EtherChannels PoE-capable switch ports automatically supply power to these connected devices (if the switch senses that there is no power on the circuit): ■Cisco pre-standard powered devices (such as Cisco IP Phones and Cisco Aironet access points) ■802.3af/802.3at-compliant powered devices A powered device can receive redundant power when it is connected only to a PoE switch port and to an AC power source. After the switch detects a powered device, it determines the device power requirements and then grants or denies power to the device. The switch can also sense the real-time power consumption of the device by monitoring and policing the power usage. This section has this PoE information: ■Supported Protocols and Standards ■Powered-Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation ■Power Management Modes The switch uses these protocols and standards to support PoE: ■CDP with power consumption—The powered device notifies the switch of the amount of power it is consuming. The switch does not reply to the power-consumption messages. The switch can only supply power to or remove power from the PoE port. ■Cisco intelligent power management—The powered device and the switch negotiate through power-negotiation CDP messages for an agreed power-consumption level. The negotiation allows a high-power Cisco powered device, which consumes more than 7 W, to operate at its highest power mode. The powered device first boots up in low-power mode, consumes less than 7 W, and negotiates to obtain enough power to operate in high-power mode. The device changes to high-power mode only when it receives confirmation from the switch. High-power devices can operate in low-power mode on switches that do not support power-negotiation CDP. Cisco intelligent power management is backward-compatible with CDP with power consumption; the switch responds according to the CDP message that it receives. CDP is not supported on third-party powered devices; therefore, the switch uses the IEEE classification to determine the power usage of the device. ■IEEE 802.3af/802.3at—The major features of this standard are powered-device discovery, power administration, disconnect detection, and optional powered-device power classification. For more information, see the standard. The switch detects a Cisco pre-standard or an IEEE-compliant powered device when the PoE-capable port is in the no-shutdown state, PoE is enabled (the default), and the connected device is not being powered by an AC adaptor. After device detection, the switch determines the device power requirements based on its type: ■A Cisco pre-standard powered device does not provide its power requirement when the switch detects it, so the switch allocates 15.4 W as the initial allocation for power budgeting. The initial power allocation is the maximum amount of power that a powered device requires. The switch initially allocates this amount of power when it detects and powers the powered device. As the switch receives CDP messages from the powered device and as the powered device negotiates power levels with the switch through CDP power-negotiation messages, the initial power allocation might be adjusted. ■The switch classifies the detected IEEE device within a power consumption class. Based on the available power in the power budget, the switch determines if a port can be powered. Table 1 lists these levels.
Note: Prior to release 15.2(6)E1, if a rack mounted, IE4010 or IE5000 series switch, was powered by 2 PWR-RGD-AC-DC-250 power supplies, the correct total PoE budget (385W) as indicated in the Data Sheet, would not be displayed. If the proper total power budget isn’t displayed on your switch, upgrade to release 15.2(6)E1 or later. The switch monitors and tracks requests for power and grants power only when it is available. The switch tracks its power budget (the amount of power available on the switch for PoE). The switch performs power-accounting calculations when a port is granted or denied power to keep the power budget up to date. After power is applied to the port, the switch uses CDP to determine the actual power consumption requirement of the connected Cisco powered devices, and the switch adjusts the power budget accordingly. This does not apply to third-party PoE devices. The switch processes a request and either grants or denies power. If the request is granted, the switch updates the power budget. If the request is denied, the switch ensures that power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates the LEDs. Powered devices can also negotiate with the switch for more power. If the switch detects a fault caused by an undervoltage, overvoltage, overtemperature, oscillator-fault, or short-circuit condition, it turns off power to the port, generates a syslog message, and updates the power budget and LEDs. Note: IE switches may show occasional PoE controller error messages on the console, for example: This can occur when there are no powered devices connected and all ports continue to function normally. There are no workarounds. These messages can be ignored. If these or any other errors seen cause performance issues, contact Cisco support. To limit the overall PoE budget of DIN rail switches such as the IE-4000, use the global configuration command power inline wattage max <4-125>. Note - This command does not apply to rack-mount switches with integrated power supplies, such as the IE-4010 and IE-5000. The switch supports these PoE modes: ■ auto —The switch automatically detects if the connected device requires power. If the switch discovers a powered device connected to the port and if the switch has enough power, it grants power, updates the power budget, turns on power to the port on a first-come, first-served basis, and updates the LEDs. For LED information, see the hardware installation guide. If the switch has enough power for all the powered devices, they all come up. If enough power is available for all powered devices connected to the switch, power is turned on to all devices. If there is not enough available PoE, or if a device is disconnected and reconnected while other devices are waiting for power, it cannot be determined which devices are granted or are denied power. If granting power would exceed the system power budget, the switch denies power, ensures that power to the port is turned off, generates a syslog message, and updates the LEDs. After power has been denied, the switch periodically rechecks the power budget and continues to attempt to grant the request for power. If a device being powered by the switch is then connected to wall power, the switch might continue to power the device. The switch might continue to report that it is still powering the device whether the device is being powered by the switch or receiving power from an AC power source. If a powered device is removed, the switch automatically detects the disconnect and removes power from the port. You can connect a nonpowered device without damaging it. You can specify the maximum wattage that is allowed on the port. If the IEEE class maximum wattage of the powered device is greater than the configured maximum value, the switch does not provide power to the port. If the switch powers a powered device, but the powered device later requests through CDP messages more than the configured maximum value, the switch removes power to the port. The power that was allocated to the powered device is reclaimed into the global power budget. If you do not specify a wattage, the switch delivers the maximum value. Use the auto setting on any PoE port. The auto mode is the default setting. ■ static —The switch pre-allocates power to the port (even when no powered device is connected) and guarantees that power will be available for the port. The switch allocates the port configured maximum wattage, and the amount is never adjusted through the IEEE class or by CDP messages from the powered device. Because power is pre-allocated, any powered device that uses less than or equal to the maximum wattage is guaranteed to be powered when it is connected to the static port. The port no longer participates in the first-come, first-served model. However, if the powered-device IEEE class is greater than the maximum wattage, the switch does not supply power to it. If the switch learns through CDP messages that the powered device needs more than the maximum wattage, the powered device is shutdown. If you do not specify a wattage, the switch pre-allocates the maximum value. The switch powers the port only if it discovers a powered device. Use the static setting on a high-priority interface. ■ never —The switch disables powered-device detection and never powers the PoE port even if an unpowered device is connected. Use this mode only when you want to make sure power is never applied to a PoE-capable port, making the port a data-only port. For information on configuring a PoE port, see Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port. When policing of the real-time power consumption is enabled, the switch takes action when a powered device consumes more power than the maximum amount allocated, also referred to as the cutoff-power value. When PoE is enabled, the switch senses the real-time power consumption of the powered device. The switch monitors the real-time power consumption of the connected powered device; this is called power monitoring or power sensing. The switch also polices the power usage with the power policing feature. Power monitoring is backward-compatible with Cisco intelligent power management and CDP-based power consumption. It works with these features to ensure that the PoE port can supply power to the powered device. For more information about these PoE features, see Supported Protocols and Standards. The switch senses the real-time power consumption of the connected device as follows: 1. The switch monitors the real-time power consumption on individual ports. 2. The switch records the power consumption, including peak power usage. The switch reports the information through the CISCO-POWER-ETHERNET-EXT-MIB. 3. If power policing is enabled, the switch polices power usage by comparing the real-time power consumption to the maximum power allocated to the device. For more information about the maximum power consumption, also referred to as the cutoff power, on a PoE port, see Maximum Power Allocation (Cutoff Power) on a PoE Port. If the device uses more than the maximum power allocation on the port, the switch can either turn off power to the port, or the switch can generate a syslog message and update the LEDs (the port LED is now blinking amber) while still providing power to the device based on the switch configuration. By default, power-usage policing is disabled on all PoE ports. If error recovery from the PoE error-disabled state is enabled, the switch automatically takes the PoE port out of the error-disabled state after the specified amount of time. If error recovery is disabled, you can manually re-enable the PoE port by using the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands. 4. If policing is disabled, no action occurs when the powered device consumes more than the maximum power allocation on the PoE port, which could adversely affect the switch. When power policing is enabled, the switch determines one of the these values as the cutoff power on the PoE port in this order: 1. Manually when you set the user-defined power level that the switch budgets for the port by using the power inline consumption default wattage global or interface configuration command 2. Manually when you set the user-defined power level that limits the power allowed on the port by using the power inline auto max max-wattage or the power inline static max max-wattage interface configuration command 3. Automatically when the switch sets the power usage of the device by using CDP power negotiation or by the IEEE classification 4. Automatically when the switch sets the power usage to be the default value of 15400 mW Use the first or second method in the previous list to manually configure the cutoff-power value by entering the power inline consumption default wattage or the power inline [ auto | static max ] max-wattage command. If you are not manually configuring the cutoff-power value, the switch automatically determines the value by using CDP power negotiation or the device IEEE classification, which is the third method in the previous list. If the switch cannot determine the value by using one of these methods, it uses the default value of 15400 mW (the fourth method in the previous list). You can configure the initial power allocation and the maximum power allocation on a port. However, these values are only the configured values that determine when the switch should turn on or turn off power on the PoE port. The maximum power allocation is not the same as the actual power consumption of the powered device. The actual cutoff power value that the switch uses for power policing is not equal to the configured power value. When power policing is enabled, the switch polices the power usage at the switch port, which is greater than the power consumption of the device. When you are manually set the maximum power allocation, you must consider the power loss over the cable from the switch port to the powered device. The cutoff power is the sum of the rated power consumption of the powered device and the worst-case power loss over the cable. The actual amount of power consumed by a powered device on a PoE port is the cutoff-power value plus a calibration factor of 500 mW (0.5 W). The actual cutoff value is approximate and varies from the configured value by a percentage of the configured value. For example, if the configured cutoff power is 12 W, the actual cutoff-value is 11.4 W, which is 5% less than the configured value. We recommend that you enable power policing when PoE is enabled on your switch. For example, if policing is disabled and you set the cutoff-power value by using the power inline auto max 6300 interface configuration command, the configured maximum power allocation on the PoE port is 6.3 W (6300 mW). The switch provides power to the connected devices on the port if the device needs up to 6.3 W. If the CDP-power negotiated value or the IEEE classification value exceeds the configured cutoff value, the switch does not provide power to the connected device. After the switch turns on power on the PoE port, the switch does not police the real-time power consumption of the device, and the device can consume more power than the maximum allocate d amount, which could adversely affect the switch and the devices connected to the other PoE ports. Because the switch supports internal power supplies and the Cisco Redundant Power System 2300 (also referred to as the RPS 2300), the total amount of power available for the powered devices varies depending on the power supply configuration. The switch supports dual power supplies. If a power supply is removed or fails and the switch does not have enough power for the powered devices, the switch first denies power to low-priority ports in descending order of port numbers, and then to high priority ports in descending numbers. The total available PoE power is 65 watts per power supply. ■If a power supply is removed and replaced by a new power supply with less power and the switch does not have enough power for the powered devices, the switch denies power to the PoE ports in auto mode in descending order of the port numbers. If the switch still does not have enough power, the switch then denies power to the PoE ports in static mode in descending order of the port numbers. ■If the new power supply supports more power than the previous one and the switch now has more power available, the switch grants power to the PoE ports in static mode in ascending order of the port numbers. If it still has power available, the switch then grants power to the PoE ports in auto mode in ascending order of the port numbers. Each dual-purpose port is considered a single interface with dual front ends (an RJ-45 connector and an SFP module connector). The dual front ends are not redundant interfaces; the switch activates only one connector of the pair. By default, dual-purpose ports are user-network interfaces (UNIs) and SFP-only module ports are network node interfaces (NNIs). TBy default, the switch dynamically selects the dual-purpose port media type that first links up. However, you can use the media-type interface configuration command to manually select the RJ-45 connector or the SFP module connector. Each dual-purpose port has two LEDs: one shows the status of the SFP module port, and one shows the status of the RJ-45 port. The port LED is on for whichever connector is active. For more information about the LEDs, see the hardware installation guide. Devices within a single VLAN can communicate directly through any switch. Ports in different VLANs cannot exchange data without going through a routing device. With a standard Layer 2 switch, ports in different VLANs have to exchange information through a router. By default, the switch provides VLAN isolation between UNIs or ENIs. UNIs and ENIs cannot exchange traffic unless they are changed to NNIs or assigned to a UNI-ENI community VLAN. By using the switch with routing enabled, when you configure both VLAN 20 and VLAN 30 with an SVI to which an IP address is assigned, packets can be sent from Host A to Host B directly through the switch with no need for an external router (Figure 1). Figure 1 Connecting VLANs with the Switch When the IP services image is running on the switch, routing can be enabled on the switch. Whenever possible, to maintain high performance, forwarding is done by the switch hardware. However, only IP Version 4 packets with Ethernet II encapsulation can be routed in hardware. The routing function can be enabled on all SVIs and routed ports. The switch routes only IP traffic. When IP routing protocol parameters and address configuration are added to an SVI or routed port, any IP traffic received from these ports is routed. Note: Windows PCs require a driver for the USB port. See the hardware installation guide for driver installation instructions. Use the supplied USB Type A-to-USB mini-Type B cable to connect a PC or other device to the switch. The connected device must include a terminal emulation application. When the switch detects a valid USB connection to a powered-on device that supports host functionality (such as a PC), input from the RJ-45 console is immediately disabled, and input from the USB console is enabled. Removing the USB connection immediately reenables input from the RJ-45 console connection. A LED on the switch shows which console connection is in use. At software startup, a log shows whether the USB or the RJ-45 console port is active. The switch first displays the RJ-45 media type. In the sample output, the switch has a connected USB console cable. Because the bootloader did not change to the USB console, the first log from the switch shows the RJ-45 console. A short time later, the console changes and the USB console log appears. When the USB cable is removed or the PC de-activates the USB connection, the hardware automatically changes to the RJ-45 console interface: You can configure the console type to always be RJ-45, and you can configure an inactivity timeout for the USB connector. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to select the RJ-45 console media type. If you configure the RJ-45 console, USB console operation is disabled, and input always remains with the RJ-45 console.
This example disables the USB console media type and enables the RJ-45 console media type. A log shows that this termination has occurred. This example shows that the console on switch reverted to RJ-45. A log entry shows when a console cable is attached. If a USB console cable is connected to the switch, it is prevented from providing input. This example reverses the previous configuration and immediately activates the USB console that is connected. The switch supports these interface types: ■Physical ports—switch ports, routed ports, UNIs, NNIs, and ENIs ■VLANs—switch virtual interfaces ■Port-channels—EtherChannel interfaces You can also configure a range of interfaces (see Configuring a Range of Interfaces). To configure a physical interface (port), specify the interface type, the module number, and the switch port number, and enter interface configuration mode. ■Type — 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports, Gigabit Ethernet (gigabitethernet or gi), TenGigabitEthernet (tengigethernet or te) for or small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. ■Module number — The module or slot number on the switch. ■Port number—The interface number on the switch. The port numbers always begin at 1, starting with the leftmost port when facing the front of the switch, for example, gigabitethernet 1/1. If there is more than one interface type (for example, 10/100 ports and SFP module ports), the port numbers restart with the second interface type: gigabitethernet 1/1. You can identify physical interfaces by physically checking the interface location on the switch. You can also use the show privileged EXEC commands to display information about a specific interface or all the interfaces on the switch. The remainder of this chapter primarily provides physical interface configuration procedures. These general instructions apply to all interface configuration processes. 1. Enter the configure terminal command at the privileged EXEC prompt: 2. Enter the interface global configuration command. Identify the interface type and the number of the connector. In this example, Fast Ethernet port 1 is selected: Note: You do not need to add a space between the interface type and interface number. For example, in the preceding line, you can specify either fastethernet 0/1, fastethernet0/1, fa 0/1, or fa0/1. 3. If you are configuring a UNI or ENI, enter the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable the interface: 4. Follow each interface command with the interface configuration commands that the interface requires. The commands that you enter define the protocols and applications that will run on the interface. The commands are collected and applied to the interface when you enter another interface command or enter end to return to privileged EXEC mode. You can also configure a range of interfaces by using the interface range or interface range macro global configuration commands. Interfaces configured in a range must be the same type and must be configured with the same feature options. 5. After you configure an interface, verify its status by using the show privileged EXEC commands listed in the Monitoring and Maintaining the Interfaces. Enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command to see a list of all interfaces on or configured for the switch. A report is provided for each interface that the device supports or for the specified interface. You can use the interface range global configuration command to configure multiple interfaces with the same configuration parameters. When you enter the interface range configuration mode, all command parameters that you enter are attributed to all interfaces within that range until you exit this mode. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a range of interfaces with the same parameters:
When using the interface range global configuration command, note these guidelines: ■Valid entries for port-range : – vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 – gigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1 – tengigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1 – port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number is 1 to 10. When you use the interface range command with port channels, the first and last port channel number must be active port channels. ■The interface range command only works with VLAN interfaces that have been configured with the interface vlan command. The show running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used with the interface range command. ■All interfaces defined as in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can enter multiple ranges in a command. This example shows how to use the interface range global configuration command to set the speed on ports 1 and 2 to 100 Mbps: This example shows how to use a comma to add different interface type strings to the range to enable Fast Ethernet ports 1 to 3 and Gigabit Ethernet ports 1 and 2 to receive 802.3x flow control pause frames: If you enter multiple configuration commands while you are in interface range mode, each command is executed as it is entered. The commands are not batched together and executed after you exit interface range mode. If you exit interface range configuration mode while the commands are being executed, some commands might not be executed on all interfaces in the range. Wait until the command prompt reappears before exiting interface range configuration mode. You can create an interface range macro to automatically select a range of interfaces for configuration. Before you can use the macro keyword in the interface range macro global configuration command string, you must use the define interface-range global configuration command to define the macro. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to define an interface range macro:
Use the no define interface-range macro_name global configuration command to delete a macro. When using the define interface-range global configuration command, note these guidelines: ■Valid entries for interface-range : – vlan vlan-ID - vlan-ID, where the VLAN ID is 1 to 4094 – gigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1 – tengigabitethernet module/{ first port } - { last port }, where the module is always 1 – port-channel port-channel-number - port-channel-number, where the port-channel-number is 1 to 10. When you use the interface ranges with port channels, the first and last port channel number must be active port channels. ■You must add a space between the first interface number and the hyphen when entering an interface-range. For example, GigabitEthernet1 /17 - 18 is a valid range; GigabitEthernet1/17-18 is not a valid range. ■The VLAN interfaces must have been configured with the interface vlan command. The show running-config privileged EXEC command displays the configured VLAN interfaces. VLAN interfaces not displayed by the show running-config command cannot be used as interface-ranges. ■All interfaces defined as in a range must be the same type (all Fast Ethernet ports, all Gigabit Ethernet ports, all EtherChannel ports, or all VLANs), but you can combine multiple interface types in a macro. This example shows how to define an interface-range named enet_list to include ports 1 and 2 and to verify the macro configuration: This example shows how to create a multiple-interface macro named macro1 and assign all of the interfaces in the range to a VLAN: This example shows how to enter interface range configuration mode for the interface-range macro enet_list : This example shows how to delete the interface-range macro enet_list and to verify that it was deleted. ■Default Ethernet Interface Configuration ■Configuring the Port Type ■Configuring Interface Speed and Duplex Mode ■Configuring a Power Management Mode on a PoE Port ■Budgeting Power for Devices Connected to a PoE Port ■Configuring IEEE 802.3x Flow Control ■Configuring Auto-MDIX on an Interface ■Adding a Description for an Interface Table 6 shows the Ethernet interface default configuration for NNIs, and Table 7 shows the Ethernet interface default configuration for UNIs and ENIs. For more details on the VLAN parameters listed in the table, see Configuring VLANs Note: To configure Layer 2 parameters, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, you must enter the switchport interface configuration command without any parameters to put the interface into Layer 2 mode. This shuts down the interface and then re-enables it, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. When you put an interface that is in Layer 3 mode into Layer 2 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration.
By default, all the 10/100 ports on the switch are configured as UNIs, and the SFP module ports are configured as NNIs. You use the port-type interface configuration command to change the port types. An ENI has the same characteristics as a UNI, but it can be configured to support CDP, STP, LLDP, and Etherchannel LACP and PAgP. When a port is changed from an NNI to a UNI or ENI, it inherits the configuration of the assigned VLAN, either in isolated or community mode. When you change a port from NNI to UNI or ENI or the reverse, any features exclusive to the port type revert to the default configuration. For Layer 2 protocols, such as STP, CDP, and LLDP, the default for UNIs and ENIs is disabled (although they can be enabled on ENIs) and the default for NNIs is enabled. Note: By default, the switch sends keepalive messages on UNI s and ENIs and does not send keepalive messages on NNIs. Changing the port type from UNI or ENI to NNI or from NNI to UNI or ENI has no effect on the keepalive status. You can change the keepalive state from the default setting by entering the [ no ] keepalive interface configuration command. If you enter the keepalive command with no arguments, keepalive packets are sent with the default time interval (10 seconds) and number of retries (5). Entering the no keepalive command disables keepalive packets on the interface. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the port type on an interface:
Entering the no port-type or default port-type interface configuration command returns the port to the default state: UNI for Fast Ethernet ports and NNI for Gigabit Ethernet ports. This example shows how to change a port from a UNI to an NNI and save it to the running configuration. Ethernet interfaces on the switch operate at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps and in either full- or half-duplex mode. In full-duplex mode, two stations can send and receive traffic at the same time. Normally, 10-Mbps ports operate in half-duplex mode, which means that stations can either receive or send traffic. Switch models include combinations of Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mbps) ports, Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports, and small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module slots supporting SFP modules. These sections describe how to configure the interface speed and duplex mode: ■Speed and Duplex Configuration Guidelines ■Setting the Interface Speed and Duplex Parameters When configuring an interface speed and duplex mode, note these guidelines: ■You can configure interface speed on Fast Ethernet (10/100-Mbps) and Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000-Mbps) ports. You can configure Fast Ethernet ports to full-duplex, half-duplex, or to autonegotiate mode. You can configure Gigabit Ethernet ports to full-duplex mode or to autonegotiate. You also can configure Gigabit Ethernet ports to half-duplex mode if the speed is 10 or 100 Mbps. Half-duplex mode is not supported on Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mbps. ■With the exception of when 1000BASE-T SFP modules are installed in the SFP module slots, you cannot configure speed on SFP module ports, but you can configure speed to not negotiate (nonegotiate) if connected to a device that does not support autonegotiation. However, when a 1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure speed as 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps, or auto, but not as nonegotiate. On a 100BASE-FX SFP module, you cannot configure the speed as nonegotiate. ■You cannot configure duplex mode on SFP module ports; they operate in full-duplex mode except in these situations: –When a Cisco1000BASE-T SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to auto or full. Half-duplex mode is supported with the auto setting. –When a Cisco100BASE-FX SFP module is in the SFP module slot, you can configure duplex mode to half or full (the default for this SFP module). Although the auto keyword is available, it puts the interface in full-duplex mode because the 100BASE-FX SFP module does not support autonegotiation. ■If both ends of the line support autonegotiation, we highly recommend the default setting of auto negotiation. ■If you configure the speed as nonegotiate on one device and configure auto negotiation on the remote device, the port may go down on some platforms. The IEEE specification does not define the expected behavior of an auto negotiation mismatch on a 1000BaseX link. The link may or may not come up. ■If one interface supports autonegotiation and the other end does not, configure duplex and speed on both interfaces; do not use the auto setting on the supported side. ■When STP is enabled and a port is reconfigured, the switch can take up to 30 seconds to check for loops. The port LED is amber while STP reconfigures. Caution: Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and re-enable the interface during the reconfiguration. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to set the speed and duplex mode for a physical interface.
Use the no speed and no duplex interface configuration commands to return the interface to the default speed and duplex settings (autonegotiate). To return all interface settings to the defaults, use the default interface interface-id interface configuration command. This example shows how to set the interface speed to 10 Mbps and the duplex mode to half on a 10/100 Mbps port: This example shows how to set the interface speed to 100 Mbps on a 10/100/1000 Mbps port: For most situations, the default configuration (auto mode) works well, providing plug-and-play operation. No further configuration is required. However, use the following procedure to give a PoE port higher priority, to make it data only, or to specify a maximum wattage to disallow high-power powered devices on a port. Note: When you make PoE configuration changes, the port being configured drops power. Depending on the new configuration, the state of the other PoE ports, and the state of the power budget, the port might not be powered up again. For example, port 1 is in the auto and on state, and you configure it for static mode. The switch removes power from port 1, detects the powered device, and repowers the port. If port 1 is in the auto and on state and you configure it with a maximum wattage of 10 W, the switch removes power from the port and then redetects the powered device. The switch repowers the port only if the powered device is a Class 1, Class 2, or a Cisco-only powered device. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a power management mode on a PoE-capable port:
When Cisco powered devices are connected to PoE ports, the switch uses Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to determine the actual power consumption of the devices, and the switch adjusts the power budget accordingly. The CDP protocol works with Cisco powered devices and does not apply to IEEE third-party powered devices. For these devices, when the switch grants a power request, the switch adjusts the power budget according to the powered-device IEEE classification. If the powered device is a Class 0 (class status unknown) or a Class 3, the switch budgets 30,000 milliwatts for the device, regardless of the actual amount of power needed. If the powered device reports a higher class than its actual consumption or does not support power classification (defaults to Class 0), the switch can power fewer devices because it uses the IEEE class information to track the global power budget. By using the power inline consumption wattage configuration command, you can override the default power requirement specified by the IEEE classification. The difference between what is mandated by the IEEE classification and what is actually needed by the device is reclaimed into the global power budget for use by additional devices. You can then extend the switch power budget and use it more effectively. Caution: You should carefully plan your switch power budget and make certain not to oversubscribe the power supply. Note: When you manually configure the power budget, you must also consider the power loss over the cable between the switch and the powered device. When you enter the power inline consumption default wattage or the no power inline consumption default global configuration command, or the power inline consumption wattage or the no power inline consumption interface configuration command this caution message appears: If the power supply is over-subscribed to by up to 20 percent, the switch continues to operate but its reliability is reduced. If the power supply is subscribed to by more than 20 percent, the short-circuit protection circuitry triggers and shuts the switch down. For more information about the IEEE power classifications, see Power over Ethernet Ports. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure the amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to each PoE port on a switch:
To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption default global configuration command. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to a specific PoE port:
To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption interface configuration command. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure amount of power budgeted to a powered device connected to a specific PoE port:
To return to the default setting, use the no power inline consumption interface configuration command. 802.3x flow control enables connected Ethernet ports to control traffic rates during congestion by allowing congested nodes to pause link operation at the other end. If one port experiences congestion and cannot receive any more traffic, it notifies the other port by sending a pause frame to stop sending until the condition clears. Upon receipt of a pause frame, the sending device stops sending any data packets, which prevents any loss of data packets during the congestion period. Note: Ports can receive, but not send, pause frames. You use the flowcontrol interface configuration command to set the interface’s ability to receive pause frames to on, off, or desired. The default state is off. When set to desired, an interface can operate with an attached device that is required to send flow-control packets or with an attached device that is not required to but can send flow-control packets. These rules apply to 802.3x flow control settings on the device: ■ receive on (or desired): The port cannot send pause frames but can operate with an attached device that is required to or can send pause frames; the port can receive pause frames. ■ receive off : 802.3x flow control does not operate in either direction. In case of congestion, no indication is given to the link partner, and no pause frames are sent or received by either device. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure 802.3x flow control on an interface:
To disable 802.3x flow control, use the flowcontrol receive off interface configuration command. This example shows how to enable 802.3x flow control on a port: When automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) is enabled on an interface, the interface automatically detects the required cable connection type (straight through or crossover) and configures the connection appropriately. When connecting switches without the auto-MDIX feature, you must use straight-through cables to connect to devices such as servers, workstations, or routers and crossover cables to connect to other switches or repeaters. With auto-MDIX enabled, you can use either type of cable to connect to other devices, and the interface automatically corrects for any incorrect cabling. For more information about cabling requirements, see the hardware installation guide. Auto-MDIX is enabled by default. When you enable auto-MDIX, you must also set the speed and duplex on the interface to auto so that the feature operates correctly. Auto-MDIX is supported on all 10/100 and 10/100/1000 Mbps interfaces and on Cisco 10/100/1000 BASE-T/TX SFP module interfaces. It is not supported on 1000 BASE-SX or -LX SFP module interfaces. Table 4 shows the link states that result from auto-MDIX settings and correct and incorrect cabling.
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure auto-MDIX on an interface:
To disable auto-MDIX, use the no mdix auto interface configuration command. This example shows how to enable auto-MDIX on a port: You can add a description about an interface to help you remember its function. The description appears in the output of these privileged EXEC commands: show configuration, show running-config, and show interfaces. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to add a description for an interface:
Use the no description interface configuration command to delete the description. This example shows how to add a description on a port and how to verify the description: The switch must be running the IP services image to support Layer 3 interfaces: ■SVIs: You should configure SVIs for any VLANs for which you want to route traffic. SVIs are created when you enter a VLAN ID following the interface vlan global configuration command. To delete an SVI, use the no interface vlan global configuration command. You cannot delete interface VLAN 1. When you create an SVI, it does not become active until it is associated with a physical port. ■Routed ports: Routed ports are physical ports configured to be in Layer 3 mode by using the no switchport interface configuration command. ■Layer 3 EtherChannel ports: EtherChannel interfaces made up of routed ports. A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI. There is no defined limit to the number of SVIs and routed ports that can be configured in a switch. However, the interrelationship between the number of SVIs and routed ports and the number of other features being configured might have an impact on CPU usage because of hardware limitations. If the switch is using maximum hardware resources, attempts to create a routed port or SVI have these results: ■If you try to create a new routed port, the switch generates a message that there are not enough resources to convert the interface to a routed port, and the interface remains as a switch port. ■If you try to create an extended-range VLAN, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected. ■If the switch attempts to boot up with a configuration that has more VLANs and routed ports than hardware can support, the VLANs are created, but the routed ports are shut down, and the switch sends a message that this was due to insufficient hardware resources. All Layer 3 interfaces require an IP address to route traffic. This procedure shows how to configure an interface as a Layer 3 interface and how to assign an IP address to an interface. Note: If the physical port is in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter the no switc hport interface configuration command to put the interface into Layer 3 mode. Entering a no switchport command disables and then re-enables the interface, which might generate messages on the device to which the interface is connected. Furthermore, when you put an interface that is in Layer 2 mode into Layer 3 mode, the previous configuration information related to the affected interface might be lost, and the interface is returned to its default configuration Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to configure a Layer 3 interface:
To remove an IP address from an interface, use the no ip address interface configuration command. This example shows how to configure a port as a routed port and to assign it an IP address: The default maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for frames received and sent on all interfaces on the switch is 1500 bytes. You can increase the MTU size for all interfaces operating at 10 or 100 Mbps by using the system mtu global configuration command. You can increase the MTU size to support jumbo frames on all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces by using the system mtu jumbo global configuration command. You can change the MTU size for routed ports by using the system mtu routing global configuration command. Note: You cannot configure a routing MTU size that exceeds the system MTU size. If you change the system MTU size to a value smaller than the currently configured routing MTU size, the configuration change is accepted, but not applied until the next switch reset. When the configuration change takes effect, the routing MTU size automatically defaults to the new system MTU size. Gigabit Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu command. Fast Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu jumbo command because jumbo frames are not supported on 10/100 interfaces, including 100BASE-FX and 100BASE-BX SFP modules. If you do not configure the system mtu jumbo command, the setting of the system mtu command applies to all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. You cannot set the MTU size for an individual interface; you set it for all 10/100 or all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the switch. When you change the system MTU size, you must reset the switch before the new configuration takes effect. The system mtu routing command does not require a switch reset to take effect. Note: The system MTU setting is saved in the switch environmental variable in NVRAM and becomes effective when the switch reloads. The MTU settings you enter with the system mtu and system mtu jumbo commands are not saved in the switch IOS configuration file, even if you enter the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Therefore, if you use TFTP to configure a new switch by using a backup configuration file and want the system MTU to be other than the default, you must explicitly configure the system mtu and system mtu jumbo settings on the new switch and then reload the switch. Frames sizes that can be received by the switch CPU are limited to 1998 bytes, no matter what value was entered with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo commands. Although frames that are forwarded or routed are typically not received by the CPU, in some cases packets are sent to the CPU, such as traffic sent to control traffic, SNMP, Telnet, or routing protocols. Because the switch does not fragment packets, it drops: ■switched packets larger than the packet size supported on the egress interface ■routed packets larger than the routing MTU value For example, if the system mtu value is 1998 bytes and the system mtu jumbo value is 5000 bytes, packets up to 5000 bytes can be received on interfaces operating at 1000 Mbps. However, although a packet larger than 1998 bytes can be received on an interface operating at 1000 Mbps, if its destination interface is operating at 10 or 100 Mbps, the packet is dropped. Routed packets are subjected to MTU checks on the sending ports. The MTU value used for routed ports is derived from the configured system mtu value (not the system mtu jumbo value). That is, the routed MTU is never greater than the system MTU for any VLAN. The routing protocols use the system MTU value when negotiating adjacencies and the MTU of the link. For example, the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol uses this MTU value before setting up an adjacency with a peer router. To view the MTU value for routed packets for a specific VLAN, use the show platform port-asic mvid privileged EXEC command. Note: If Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are configured to accept frames greater than the 10/100 interfaces, jumbo frames received on a Layer 2 Gigabit Ethernet interface and sent on a Layer 2 10/100 interface are dropped. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to change the MTU size for all 10/100 or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces:
If you enter a value that is outside the allowed range for the specific type of interface, the value is not accepted. Once the switch reloads, you can verify your settings by entering the show system mtu privileged EXEC command. This example shows how to set the maximum packet size for a Gigabit Ethernet port to 1800 bytes: This example shows the response when you try to set Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to an out-of-range number: These sections contain interface monitoring and maintenance information: ■Monitoring Interface Status ■Using FEFI to Maintain the Fiber FE Interfaces ■Clearing and Resetting Interfaces and Counters ■Shutting Down and Restarting the Interface Commands entered at the privileged EXEC prompt display information about the interface, including the versions of the software and the hardware, the configuration, and statistics about the interfaces. Table 8 lists some of these interface monitoring commands. (You can display the full list of show commands by using the show ? command at the privileged EXEC prompt.)
A far end fault is an error in the link that one station detects but the other does not, such as a disconnected Tx wire. In this example, the sending station still receives valid data and detects that the link is good through the link integrity monitor. The sending station does not detect that its own transmission is not being received by the other station. A 100BASE-FX station that detects a remote fault like this modifies its transmitted IDLE stream to send a special bit pattern (FEFI IDLE pattern) to inform the neighbor of the remote fault. The FEFI-IDLE pattern then triggers a shutdown of the remote port (notconnect). Fiber FastEthernet hardware uses far end fault indication (FEFI) to bring the link down on both sides of the link in these situations. A similar function is provided by link negotiation for Gigabit Ethernet. FEFI is not supported on copper ports, which do not usually have issues in which one station can detect while the other cannot. Copper ports use Ethernet link pulses to monitor the link. With FEFI, no forwarding loop occurs because there is no connectivity between the ports. If the link is up on one side and down on the other, however, blackholing of traffic might occur. Use Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD) to prevent traffic blackholing. FEFI is enabled globally and not configurable on the switch, however it applies only to the fiber Fast Ethernet SFP interfaces on the switch. FEFI can be used on the switch Gigabit Ethernet (GE) SFP ports when the GE ports are connected with 100FX/LX SFP transceiver type. However, using these SFP transceivers limits the GE interfaces to 100 MB/s. Table 9 lists the privileged EXEC mode clear commands that you can use to clear counters and reset interfaces.
To clear the interface counters shown by the show interfaces privileged EXEC command, use the clear counters privileged EXEC command. The clear counters command clears all current interface counters from the interface unless you specify optional arguments that clear only a specific interface type from a specific interface number. Note: The clear counters privileged EXEC command does not clear counters retrieved by using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), but only those seen with the show interface privileged EXEC command. Shutting down an interface disables all functions on the specified interface and marks the interface as unavailable on all monitoring command displays. This information is communicated to other network servers through all dynamic routing protocols. The interface is not mentioned in any routing updates. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to shut down an interface:
Use the no shutdown interface configuration command to enable an interface. To verify that an interface is disabled, enter the show interfaces privileged EXEC command. A disabled interface is shown as administratively down in the display. Page 4
Cisco IE series switches support PROFINET I/O, RT but not IRT (isochronous real-time). PROFINET is the PROFIBUS International (PI) open Industrial Ethernet Standard that uses TCP/IP and IT standards for automation control. PROFINET is particularly useful for industrial automation systems and process control networks, in which motion control and precision control of instrumentation and test equipment are important. It emphasizes data exchange and defines communication paths to meet speed requirements. PROFINET communication is scalable on three levels: ■Normal non-real-time communication uses TCP/IP and enables bus cycle times of approximately 100 ms. ■Real-time communication enables cycle times of approximately 10 ms. ■Isochronous real-time communication enables cycle times of approximately 1 ms. PROFINET I/O is a modular communication framework for distributed automation applications. PROFINET I/O uses cyclic data transfer to exchange data, alarms, and diagnostic information with programmable controllers, input/output (I/O) devices, and other automation controllers (for example, motion controllers). PROFINET I/O recognizes three classes of devices: ■I/O devices ■I/O controllers ■I/O supervisors Figure 15 PROFINET Device Roles An I/O controller is a programmable logic controller (PLC) that controls I/O devices and exchanges data such as configuration, alarms, and I/O data through an automation program. The I/O controller and the I/O supervisor exchange diagnostic information. The I/O controller shares configuration and input/output information with the I/O device and receives alarms from the I/O device. PROFINET is designed to be the sole or primary management system platform. Because the I/O controller detects the switch with the Discovery and Configuration Protocol (DCP), and sets the device name and IP address, you do not need to enter Cisco IOS commands for the basic configuration. For advanced configurations (for example, QoS, DHCP, and similar features) you must use Cisco IOS commands on the switch because these features cannot be configured by using PROFINET. An I/O supervisor is an engineering station, such as a human machine interface (HMI) or PC, used for commissioning, monitoring, and diagnostic analysis. The I/O supervisor exchanges diagnostic, status, control, and parameter information with the I/O device. An I/O device is a distributed input/output device such as a sensor, an actuator, or a motion controller. Note: If Profinet DCP cannot detect the switch/PLC/IO mac addresses, temporarily disable the firewall/virus scan from the Window PC that installed the Siemens STEP7 or TIA Portal. In a PROFINET I/O system, all the I/O devices communicate over an Ethernet communication network to meet the automation industry requirement for bus cycle times of less than 100 ms. The network uses switches and full-duplex data exchange to avoid data collisions. After PROFINET uses DCP to discover devices, including the switch, they establish application relationships (ARs) and communication relationships (CRs). After a connection is established and information about device parameters is exchanged, input and output data is exchanged. The switch uses non-real-time CRs to exchange the data attributes listed in Table 17 and Table 18.
PROFINET devices are integrated by using a general station description (GSD) file that contains the data for engineering and data exchange between the I/O controller, the I/O supervisor, and the I/O devices, including the switch. Each PROFINET I/O field device must have an associated GSD file that describes the properties of the device and contains all this information required for configuration: ■Device identification information (device ID, vendor ID and name, product family, number of ports) ■Number and types of pluggable modules ■Error text for diagnostic information ■Communication parameters for I/O devices, including the minimum cycle time, the reduction ratio, and the watch dog time ■Configuration data for the I/O device modules, including speed, duplex, VLAN, port security information, alarms, and broadcast-rate-limiting thresholds ■Parameters configured for I/O device modules for the attributes listed in Table 18 The GSD file is on the switch, but the I/O supervisor uses this file. Note: You must use the GSD file that is associated with the Cisco IOS release on the switch to manage your PROFINET network. Both the I/O supervisor and the Cisco IOS software alert you to a mismatch between the GSD file and the switch Cisco IOS software version. You can use either the PROFINET software on the I/O supervisor or the Cisco IOS software for basic switch configuration. After you enable PROFINET, LLDP is automatically enabled on the switch because PROFINET relies on LLDP to fully function. If you disable PROFINET, you can enable or disable LLDP as needed. PROFINET is enabled by default on all the base switch module ports. The default config is enabled on VLAN 1 but can be changed to another VLAN ID. If PROFINET has been disabled, follow the instructions in the Enabling PROFINET.
The PLC has LEDs that display red for alarms, and the I/O supervisor software monitors those alarms. To troubleshoot PROFINET use the debug profinet privileged EXEC command with the keywords shown in Commands for Troubleshooting the PROFINET ConfigurationTable 20. Be aware that the output of a debug command might cause a serial link to fail. You should use these commands only under the guidance of a Cisco Technical Support engineer. When you use this command, use Telnet to access the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) by using Ethernet rather than a serial port.
The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 5
Note: The documentation set for this product strives to use bias-free language. For purposes of this documentation set, bias-free is defined as language that does not imply discrimination based on age, disability, gender, racial identity, ethnic identity, sexual orientation, socioeconomic status, and intersectionality. Exceptions may be present in the documentation due to language that is hardcoded in the user interfaces of the product software, language used based on RFP documentation, or language that is used by a referenced third-party product. This guide is for the networking professional managing your switch. Before using this guide, you should have experience working with the Cisco IOS software and be familiar with the concepts and terminology of Ethernet and local area networking. This guide provides the information that you need to configure Cisco IOS software features on your switch. This guide provides procedures for using the commands that have been created or changed for use with the switch. It does not provide detailed information about these commands. For information about the standard Cisco IOS commands, see the Cisco IOS 15.0 documentation set available from the Cisco.com home page. This guide does not provide detailed information on the graphical user interfaces (GUIs) for the embedded Device Manager. However, the concepts in this guide are applicable to the GUI user. For information about Device Manager, see the switch online help. For documentation updates, see the release notes for this release. This publication uses these conventions to convey instructions and information: Command descriptions use these conventions: ■Commands and keywords are in boldface text. ■Arguments for which you supply values are in italic. ■Square brackets ([ ]) mean optional elements. ■Braces ({ }) group required choices, and vertical bars ( |) separate the alternative elements. ■Braces and vertical bars within square brackets ([{ | }]) mean a required choice within an optional element. Interactive examples use these conventions: ■Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen font. ■Information you enter is in boldface screen font. ■Nonprinting characters, such as passwords or tabs, are in angle brackets (< >). Notes, cautions, and timesavers use these conventions and symbols: Note: Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual. Caution: Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data. These documents provide complete information about the switch series and are available from this Cisco.com site: http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-4000-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-4010-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/switches/industrial-ethernet-5000-series-switches/tsd-products-support-series-home.html Before installing, configuring, or upgrading the switch, see these documents: ■For initial configuration information, see the “Configuring the Switch with the CLI-Based Setup Program” appendix in the hardware installation guide. ■For Device Manager requirements, see the “System Requirements” section in the release notes (not orderable but available on Cisco.com). ■For upgrading information, see the “Downloading Software” section in the release notes. See these documents for other information about the switch: ■Release Notes ■ Software Configuration Guide ■ Hardware Installation Guide ■ Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information ■Device Manager online help (available on the switch) ■Compatibility matrix documents are available from this Cisco.com site: ■To receive timely, relevant information from Cisco, sign up at Cisco Profile Manager. ■To get the business impact you’re looking for with the technologies that matter, visit Cisco Services. ■To submit a service request, visit Cisco Support. ■To discover and browse secure, validated enterprise-class apps, products, solutions and services, visit Cisco Marketplace. ■To obtain general networking, training, and certification titles, visit Cisco Press. ■To find warranty information for a specific product or product family, access Cisco Warranty Finder. Cisco Bug Search Tool (BST) is a web-based tool that acts as a gateway to the Cisco bug tracking system that maintains a comprehensive list of defects and vulnerabilities in Cisco products and software. BST provides you with detailed defect information about your products and software. Page 6
CDP is a device discovery protocol that runs over Layer 2 (the data link layer) on all Cisco-manufactured devices (routers, bridges, access servers, and switches) and allows network management applications to discover Cisco devices that are neighbors of already known devices. With CDP, network management applications can learn the device type and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent address of neighboring devices running lower-layer, transparent protocols. This feature enables applications to send SNMP queries to neighboring devices. CDP runs on all media that support Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). Because CDP runs over the data-link layer only, two systems that support different network-layer protocols can learn about each other. Each CDP-configured device sends periodic messages to a multicast address, advertising at least one address at which it can receive SNMP messages. The advertisements also contain time-to-live, or holdtime information, which is the length of time a receiving device holds CDP information before discarding it. Each device also listens to the messages sent by other devices to learn about neighboring devices. On the switch, CDP enables Network Assistant to display a graphical view of the network. The switch uses CDP to find cluster candidates and maintain information about cluster members and other devices up to three cluster-enabled devices away from the command switch by default. For a switch and connected endpoint devices running Cisco Medianet, these events occur: ■CDP identifies connected endpoints that communicate directly with the switch. ■Only one wired switch reports the location information to prevent duplicate reports of neighboring devices. ■The wired switch and the endpoints both send and receive location information. The switch supports CDP Version 2.
You can configure the frequency of CDP updates, the amount of time to hold the information before discarding it, and whether or not to send Version-2 advertisements. Note: Steps 2 through 4 are all optional and can be performed in any order.
CDP is enabled by default. Note: Switch clusters and other Cisco devices (such as Cisco IP Phones) regularly exchange CDP messages. Disabling CDP can interrupt cluster discovery and device connectivity.
This example shows how to configure CDP parameters: This example shows how to enable CDP on a port when it has been disabled: Note: Voice VLAN is not counted against port security when CDP is disabled on the switch interface. This example shows how to enable CDP if it has been disabled: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 7 You can use SDM templates to configure system resources in the switch to optimize support for specific features, depending on how the switch is used in the network. You can select a template to provide maximum system usage for some functions or use the default template to balance resources. To allocate ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) resources for different usages, the switch SDM templates prioritize system resources to optimize support for certain features. When running the IPservices license, you can select SDM templates to optimize these features: ■Default—The default template gives balance to all Layer 2 functions. ■Dual IPv4 and IPv6—Allows the switch to be used in dual-stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6). ■Routing—The routing template maximizes system resources for IPv4 unicast routing, typically required for a router or aggregator in the center of a network. See Dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM Default Template. There are four templates for ip services and one template for lanbase licensing. Table 23 IP Services license SDM Templates Unicast MAC addresses 16 K 16 K 16 K 16 K IPv4 IGMP or IPv6 groups 1K IPv4 1K IPv4 1K IPv4 1K IPv6 1K IPv4 1K IPv6 Direct routes 16K IPv4 16K IPv4 4K IPv4 4K IPv6 4K IPv4 4K IPv6 Indirect routes 2K IPv4 8K IPv4 1.25K IPv4 1.25K IPv6 2K IPv4 3K IPv6 IPv4 or IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs 0.125K (IPv4 PBR) 0.5K (IPv4 PBR) 0.25K (IPv4 PBR) 0.25K (IPv6 PBR) 0.125K (IPv4 PBR) 0.125K (IPv6 PBR) IPv4 or IPv6 QoSACEs 1.875K (IPv4 QoS) 0.5K (IPv4 QoS) 0.5K (IPv4 QoS) 0.375K (IPv6 QoS) 0.5K (IPv4 QoS) 0.125K (IPv6 QoS) IPv4 or IPv6 port or MAC security ACEs 1.875K (IPv4 ACL) 1K (IPv4 ACL) 0.75K (IPv4 ACL) 0.375K (IPv6 ACL) 0.625K (IPv4 ACL) 0.125K (IPv6 ACL) Table 24 Lanbase license SDM Template Unicast MAC addresses 16 K IPv4 IGMP or IPv6 groups 1K IPv4/1K IPv6 Direct routes 4K IPv4/4K IPv6 Indirect routes 1.25K IPv4/1.25K IPv6 IPv4 or IPv6 policy-based routing ACEs 0.25K (IPv4 PBR)/0.25K (IPv6 PBR) IPv4 or IPv6 QoSACEs 1K (IPv4 QoS)/0.25K (IPv6 QoS) IPv4 or IPv6 port or MAC security ACEs 1K (IPv4 ACL)/0.25K (IPv6 ACL) The first eight rows in the tables (unicast MAC addresses through security ACEs) represent approximate hardware boundaries set when a template is selected. If a section of a hardware resource is full, all processing overflow is sent to the CPU, seriously impacting switch performance. You can select an SDM template to support IP Version 6 (IPv6) switching. The dual IPv4 and IPv6 template allows the switch to be used in dual-stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6). Using the dual-stack templates results in less TCAM capacity allowed for each resource. You should not use this template if you plan to forward only IPv4 traffic. These SDM templates support IPv4 and IPv6 environments: ■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 default template—Supports Layer 2, QoS, and ACLs for IPv4; and Layer 2, IPv6 host, and ACLs for IPv6. ■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 routing template—Supports Layer 2, multicast, routing (including policy-based routing), QoS, and ACLs for IPv4; and Layer 2, routing, and ACLs for IPv6. Page 8
This chapter describes how to configure the Cisco implementation of the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on the switch. Note: The multiple spanning-tree (MST) implementation is based on the IEEE 802.1s standard. The MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be mapped to the same spanning-tree instance, reducing the number of spanning-tree instances needed to support a large number of VLANs. The MSTP provides for multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load balancing. It improves the fault tolerance of the network because a failure in one instance (forwarding path) does not affect other instances (forwarding paths). The most common initial deployment of MSTP is in the backbone and distribution layers of a Layer 2 switched network. This deployment provides the highly available network required in a service-provider environment. When the switch is in the MST mode, the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), which is based on IEEE 802.1w, is automatically enabled. The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree through explicit handshaking that eliminates the IEEE 802.1D forwarding delay and quickly transitions root ports and designated ports to the forwarding state. Both MSTP and RSTP improve the spanning-tree operation and maintain backward compatibility with equipment that is based on the (original) IEEE 802.1D spanning tree, with existing Cisco-proprietary Multiple Instance STP (MISTP), and with existing Cisco per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) and rapid per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (rapid PVST+). MSTP, which uses RSTP for rapid convergence, enables VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree instance, with each instance having a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree instances. This architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic, enables load balancing, and reduces the number of spanning-tree instances required to support a large number of VLANs. For switches to participate in multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances, you must consistently configure the switches with the same MST configuration information. A collection of interconnected switches that have the same MST configuration comprises an MST region as shown in Figure 1 on page 3. The MST configuration controls to which MST region each switch belongs. The configuration includes the name of the region, the revision number, and the MST VLAN-to-instance assignment map. You configure the switch for a region by using the spanning-tree mst configuration global configuration command, after which the switch enters the MST configuration mode. From this mode, you can map VLANs to an MST instance by using the instance MST configuration command, specify the region name by using the name MST configuration command, and set the revision number by using the revision MST configuration command. A region can have one or multiple members with the same MST configuration. Each member must be capable of processing RSTP bridge protocol data units (BPDUs). There is no limit to the number of MST regions in a network, but each region can support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. Instances can be identified by any number in the range from 0 to 4096. You can assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree instance at a time. Unlike PVST+ and rapid PVST+ in which all the spanning-tree instances are independent, the MSTP establishes and maintains two types of spanning trees: ■An internal spanning tree (IST), which is the spanning tree that runs in an MST region. Within each MST region, the MSTP maintains multiple spanning-tree instances. Instance 0 is a special instance for a region, known as the internal spanning tree (IST). All other MST instances are numbered from 1 to 4096. The IST is the only spanning-tree instance that sends and receives BPDUs. All of the other spanning-tree instance information is contained in M-records, which are encapsulated within MSTP BPDUs. Because the MSTP BPDU carries information for all instances, the number of BPDUs that need to be processed to support multiple spanning-tree instances is significantly reduced. All MST instances within the same region share the same protocol timers, but each MST instance has its own topology parameters, such as root switch ID, root path cost, and so forth. By default, all VLANs are assigned to the IST. An MST instance is local to the region; for example, MST instance 1 in region A is independent of MST instance 1 in region B, even if regions A and B are interconnected. ■A common and internal spanning tree (CIST), which is a collection of the ISTs in each MST region, and the common spanning tree (CST) that interconnects the MST regions and single spanning trees. The spanning tree computed in a region appears as a subtree in the CST that encompasses the entire switched domain. The CIST is formed by the spanning-tree algorithm running among switches that support the IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, and IEEE 802.1D standards. The CIST inside an MST region is the same as the CST outside a region. For more information, see Operations Within an MST Region, page 2 and the Operations Between MST Regions, page 3. Note: The implementation of the IEEE 802.1s standard, changes some of the terminology associated with MST implementations. The IST connects all the MSTP switches in a region. When the IST converges, the root of the IST becomes the CIST regional root (called the IST master before the implementation of the IEEE 802.1s standard) as shown in Figure 1 on page 3. It is the switch within the region with the lowest switch ID and path cost to the CIST root. The CIST regional root is also the CIST root if there is only one region in the network. If the CIST root is outside the region, one of the MSTP switches at the boundary of the region is selected as the CIST regional root. When an MSTP switch initializes, it sends BPDUs claiming itself as the root of the CIST and the CIST regional root, with both of the path costs to the CIST root and to the CIST regional root set to zero. The switch also initializes all of its MST instances and claims to be the root for all of them. If the switch receives superior MST root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently stored for the port, it relinquishes its claim as the CIST regional root. During initialization, a region might have many subregions, each with its own CIST regional root. As switches receive superior IST information, they leave their old subregions and join the new subregion that contains the true CIST regional root. All subregions shrink, except for the one that contains the true CIST regional root. For correct operation, all switches in the MST region must agree on the same CIST regional root. Therefore, any two switches in the region only synchronize their port roles for an MST instance if they converge to a common CIST regional root. If there are multiple regions or legacy IEEE 802.1D switches within the network, MSTP establishes and maintains the CST, which includes all MST regions and all legacy STP switches in the network. The MST instances combine with the IST at the boundary of the region to become the CST. The IST connects all the MSTP switches in the region and appears as a subtree in the CIST that encompasses the entire switched domain. The root of the subtree is the CIST regional root. The MST region appears as a virtual switch to adjacent STP switches and MST regions. Figure 1 on page 3 shows a network with three MST regions and a legacy IEEE 802.1D switch (D). The CIST regional root for region 1 (A) is also the CIST root. The CIST regional root for region 2 (B) and the CIST regional root for region 3 (C) are the roots for their respective subtrees within the CIST. The RSTP runs in all regions. Figure 39 MST Regions, CIST Masters, and CST Root Only the CST instance sends and receives BPDUs, and MST instances add their spanning-tree information into the BPDUs to interact with neighboring switches and compute the final spanning-tree topology. Because of this, the spanning-tree parameters related to BPDU transmission (for example, hello time, forward time, max-age, and max-hops) are configured only on the CST instance but affect all MST instances. Parameters related to the spanning-tree topology (for example, switch priority, port VLAN cost, and port VLAN priority) can be configured on both the CST instance and the MST instance. MSTP switches use Version 3 RSTP BPDUs or IEEE 802.1D STP BPDUs to communicate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. MSTP switches use MSTP BPDUs to communicate with MSTP switches. Some MST naming conventions used in Cisco’s prestandard implementation have been changed to identify some internal or regional parameters. These parameters are significant only within an MST region, as opposed to external parameters that are relevant to the whole network. Because the CIST is the only spanning-tree instance that spans the whole network, only the CIST parameters require the external rather than the internal or regional qualifiers. ■The CIST root is the root switch for the unique instance that spans the whole network, the CIST. ■The CIST external root path cost is the cost to the CIST root. This cost is left unchanged within an MST region. Remember that an MST region looks like a single switch for the CIST. The CIST external root path cost is the root path cost calculated between these virtual switches and switches that do not belong to any region. ■The CIST regional root was called the IST master in the prestandard implementation. If the CIST root is in the region, the CIST regional root is the CIST root. Otherwise, the CIST regional root is the closest switch to the CIST root in the region. The CIST regional root acts as a root switch for the IST. ■The CIST internal root path cost is the cost to the CIST regional root in a region. This cost is only relevant to the IST, instance 0. Table 41 compares the IEEE standard and the Cisco prestandard terminology.
The IST and MST instances do not use the message-age and maximum-age information in the configuration BPDU to compute the spanning-tree topology. Instead, they use the path cost to the root and a hop-count mechanism similar to the IP time-to-live (TTL) mechanism. By using the spanning-tree mst max-hops global configuration command, you can configure the maximum hops inside the region and apply it to the IST and all MST instances in that region. The hop count achieves the same result as the message-age information (triggers a reconfiguration). The root switch of the instance always sends a BPDU (or M-record) with a cost of 0 and the hop count set to the maximum value. When a switch receives this BPDU, it decrements the received remaining hop count by one and propagates this value as the remaining hop count in the BPDUs it generates. When the count reaches zero, the switch discards the BPDU and ages the information held for the port. The message-age and maximum-age information in the RSTP portion of the BPDU remain the same throughout the region, and the same values are propagated by the region designated ports at the boundary. In the Cisco prestandard implementation, a boundary port connects an MST region to a single spanning-tree region running RSTP, to a single spanning-tree region running PVST+ or rapid PVST+, or to another MST region with a different MST configuration. A boundary port also connects to a LAN, the designated switch of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST configuration. There is no definition of a boundary port in the IEEE 802.1s standard. The IEEE 802.1Q-2002 standard identifies two kinds of messages that a port can receive: internal (coming from the same region) and external. When a message is external, it is received only by the CIST. If the CIST role is root or alternate, or if the external BPDU is a topology change, it could have an impact on the MST instances. When a message is internal, the CIST part is received by the CIST, and each MST instance receives its respective M-record. The Cisco prestandard implementation treats a port that receives an external message as a boundary port. This means a port cannot receive a mix of internal and external messages. An MST region includes both switches and LANs. A segment belongs to the region of its designated port. Therefore, a port in a different region than the designated port for a segment is a boundary port. This definition allows two ports internal to a region to share a segment with a port belonging to a different region, creating the possibility of receiving both internal and external messages on a port. The primary change from the Cisco prestandard implementation is that a designated port is not defined as boundary, unless it is running in an STP-compatible mode. Note: If there is a legacy STP switch on the segment, messages are always considered external. The other change from the prestandard implementation is that the CIST regional root switch ID field is now inserted where an RSTP or legacy IEEE 802.1Q switch has the sender switch ID. The whole region performs like a single virtual switch by sending a consistent sender switch ID to neighboring switches. In this example, switch C would receive a BPDU with the same consistent sender switch ID of root, whether or not A or B is designated for the segment. The Cisco implementation of the IEEE MST standard includes features required to meet the standard, as well as some of the desirable prestandard functionality that is not yet incorporated into the published standard. The boundary role is no longer in the final MST standard, but this boundary concept is maintained in Cisco’s implementation. However, an MST instance port at a boundary of the region might not follow the state of the corresponding CIST port. Two cases exist now: ■The boundary port is the root port of the CIST regional root—When the CIST instance port is proposed and is in sync, it can send back an agreement and move to the forwarding state only after all the corresponding MSTI ports are in sync (and forwarding). The MSTI ports now have a special master role. ■The boundary port is not the root port of the CIST regional root—The MSTI ports follow the state and role of the CIST port. The standard provides less information, and it might be difficult to understand why an MSTI port can be alternately blocking when it receives no BPDUs (MRecords). In this case, although the boundary role no longer exists, the show commands identify a port as boundary in the type column of the output. Because automatic detection of prestandard switches can fail, you can use an interface configuration command to identify prestandard ports. A region cannot be formed between a standard and a prestandard switch, but they can interoperate by using the CIST. Only the capability of load balancing over different instances is lost in that particular case. The CLI displays different flags depending on the port configuration when a port receives prestandard BPDUs. A syslog message also appears the first time a switch receives a prestandard BPDU on a port that has not been configured for prestandard BPDU transmission. Figure 2 on page 6 illustrates this scenario. Assume that A is a standard switch and B a prestandard switch, both configured to be in the same region. A is the root switch for the CIST, and B has a root port (BX) on segment X and an alternate port (BY) on segment Y. If segment Y flaps, and the port on BY becomes the alternate before sending out a single prestandard BPDU, AY cannot detect that a prestandard switch is connected to Y and continues to send standard BPDUs. The port BY is fixed in a boundary, and no load balancing is possible between A and B. The same problem exists on segment X, but B might transmit topology changes. Figure 40 Standard and Prestandard Switch Interoperation Note: We recommend that you minimize the interaction between standard and prestandard MST implementations. This feature is not yet present in the IEEE MST standard, but it is included in this Cisco IOS release. The software checks the consistency of the port role and state in the received BPDUs to detect unidirectional link failures that could cause bridging loops. When a designated port detects a conflict, it keeps its role, but reverts to discarding state because disrupting connectivity in case of inconsistency is preferable to opening a bridging loop. Figure 3 on page 6 illustrates a unidirectional link failure that typically creates a bridging loop. Switch A is the root switch, and its BPDUs are lost on the link leading to switch B. RSTP and MST BPDUs include the role and state of the sending port. With this information, switch A can detect that switch B does not react to the superior BPDUs it sends and that switch B is the designated, not root switch. As a result, switch A blocks (or keeps blocking) its port, preventing the bridging loop. Figure 41 Detecting Unidirectional Link Failure A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU (a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MSTP BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RSTP BPDU (Version 2). However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch might also continue to assign a boundary role to a port when the switch to which this switch is connected has joined the region. To restart the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches), use the clear spanning-tree detected-protocols privileged EXEC command. If all the legacy switches on the link are RSTP switches, they can process MSTP BPDUs as if they are RSTP BPDUs. Therefore, MSTP switches send either a Version 0 configuration and TCN BPDUs or Version 3 MSTP BPDUs on a boundary port. A boundary port connects to a LAN, the designated switch of which is either a single spanning-tree switch or a switch with a different MST configuration. The RSTP takes advantage of point-to-point wiring and provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree. Reconfiguration of the spanning tree can occur in less than 1 second (in contrast to 50 seconds with the default settings in the IEEE 802.1D spanning tree). The RSTP provides rapid convergence of the spanning tree by assigning port roles and by learning the active topology. The RSTP builds upon the IEEE 802.1D STP to select the switch with the highest switch priority (lowest numerical priority value) as the root switch as described in the Configuring STP, page 1. Then the RSTP assigns one of these port roles to individual ports: ■Root port—Provides the best path (lowest cost) when the switch forwards packets to the root switch. ■Designated port—Connects to the designated switch, which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding packets from that LAN to the root switch. The port through which the designated switch is attached to the LAN is called the designated port. ■Alternate port—Offers an alternate path toward the root switch to that provided by the current root port. ■Backup port—Acts as a backup for the path provided by a designated port toward the leaves of the spanning tree. A backup port can exist only when two ports are connected in a loopback by a point-to-point link or when a switch has two or more connections to a shared LAN segment. ■Disabled port—Has no role within the operation of the spanning tree. A port with the root or a designated port role is included in the active topology. A port with the alternate or backup port role is excluded from the active topology. In a stable topology with consistent port roles throughout the network, the RSTP ensures that every root port and designated port immediately transition to the forwarding state while all alternate and backup ports are always in the discarding state (equivalent to blocking in IEEE 802.1D). The port state controls the operation of the forwarding and learning processes. Table 42 provides a comparison of IEEE 802.1D and RSTP port states.
To be consistent with Cisco STP implementations, this guide defines the port state as blocking instead of discarding. Designated ports start in the listening state. The RSTP provides for rapid recovery of connectivity following the failure of a switch, a switch port, or a LAN. It provides rapid convergence for edge ports, new root ports, and ports connected through point-to-point links as follows: ■Edge ports—If you configure a port as an edge port on an RSTP switch by using the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command, the edge port immediately transitions to the forwarding state. An edge port is the same as a Port Fast-enabled port, and you should enable it only on ports that connect to a single end station. ■Root ports—If the RSTP selects a new root port, it blocks the old root port and immediately transitions the new root port to the forwarding state. ■Point-to-point links—If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local port becomes a designated port, it negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology. As shown in Figure 4 on page 9, Switch A is connected to Switch B through a point-to-point link, and all of the ports are in the blocking state. Assume that the priority of Switch A is a smaller numerical value than the priority of Switch B. Switch A sends a proposal message (a configuration BPDU with the proposal flag set) to Switch B, proposing itself as the designated switch. After receiving the proposal message, Switch B selects as its new root port the port from which the proposal message was received, forces all nonedge ports to the blocking state, and sends an agreement message (a BPDU with the agreement flag set) through its new root port. After receiving Switch B’s agreement message, Switch A also immediately transitions its designated port to the forwarding state. No loops in the network are formed because Switch B blocked all of its nonedge ports and because there is a point-to-point link between Switches A and B. When Switch C is connected to Switch B, a similar set of handshaking messages are exchanged. Switch C selects the port connected to Switch B as its root port, and both ends immediately transition to the forwarding state. With each iteration of this handshaking process, one more switch joins the active topology. As the network converges, this proposal-agreement handshaking progresses from the root toward the leaves of the spanning tree. The switch learns the link type from the port duplex mode: a full-duplex port is considered to have a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared connection. You can override the default setting that is controlled by the duplex setting by using the spanning-tree link-type interface configuration command. Figure 42 Proposal and Agreement Handshaking for Rapid Convergence When the switch receives a proposal message on one of its ports and that port is selected as the new root port, the RSTP forces all other ports to synchronize with the new root information. The switch is synchronized with superior root information received on the root port if all other ports are synchronized. An individual port on the switch is synchronized if ■That port is in the blocking state. ■It is an edge port (a port configured to be at the edge of the network). If a designated port is in the forwarding state and is not configured as an edge port, it transitions to the blocking state when the RSTP forces it to synchronize with new root information. In general, when the RSTP forces a port to synchronize with root information and the port does not satisfy any of the above conditions, its port state is set to blocking. After ensuring that all of the ports are synchronized, the switch sends an agreement message to the designated switch corresponding to its root port. When the switches connected by a point-to-point link are in agreement about their port roles, the RSTP immediately transitions the port states to forwarding. The sequence of events is shown in Figure 5 on page 10. Figure 43 Sequence of Events During Rapid Convergence The RSTP BPDU format is the same as the IEEE 802.1D BPDU format except that the protocol version is set to 2. A new 1-byte Version 1 Length field is set to zero, which means that no version 1 protocol information is present. Table 3 shows the RSTP flag fields.
The sending switch sets the proposal flag in the RSTP BPDU to propose itself as the designated switch on that LAN. The port role in the proposal message is always set to the designated port. The sending switch sets the agreement flag in the RSTP BPDU to accept the previous proposal. The port role in the agreement message is always set to the root port. The RSTP does not have a separate topology change notification (TCN) BPDU. It uses the topology change (TC) flag to show the topology changes. However, for interoperability with IEEE 802.1D switches, the RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs. The learning and forwarding flags are set according to the state of the sending port. If a port receives superior root information (lower switch ID, lower path cost, and so forth) than currently stored for the port, the RSTP triggers a reconfiguration. If the port is proposed and is selected as the new root port, RSTP forces all the other ports to synchronize. If the BPDU received is an RSTP BPDU with the proposal flag set, the switch sends an agreement message after all of the other ports are synchronized. If the BPDU is an IEEE 802.1D BPDU, the switch does not set the proposal flag and starts the forward-delay timer for the port. The new root port requires twice the forward-delay time to transition to the forwarding state. If the superior information received on the port causes the port to become a backup or alternate port, RSTP sets the port to the blocking state but does not send the agreement message. The designated port continues sending BPDUs with the proposal flag set until the forward-delay timer expires, at which time the port transitions to the forwarding state. If a designated port receives an inferior BPDU (higher switch ID, higher path cost, and so forth than currently stored for the port) with a designated port role, it immediately replies with its own information. This section describes the differences between the RSTP and the IEEE 802.1D in handling spanning-tree topology changes. ■Detection—Unlike IEEE 802.1D in which any transition between the blocking and the forwarding state causes a topology change, only transitions from the blocking to the forwarding state cause a topology change with RSTP (only an increase in connectivity is considered a topology change). State changes on an edge port do not cause a topology change. When an RSTP switch detects a topology change, it deletes the learned information on all of its nonedge ports except on those from which it received the TC notification. ■Notification—Unlike IEEE 802.1D, which uses TCN BPDUs, the RSTP does not use them. However, for IEEE 802.1D interoperability, an RSTP switch processes and generates TCN BPDUs. ■Acknowledgement—When an RSTP switch receives a TCN message on a designated port from an IEEE 802.1D switch, it replies with an IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set. However, if the TC-while timer (the same as the topology-change timer in IEEE 802.1D) is active on a root port connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and a configuration BPDU with the TCA bit set is received, the TC-while timer is reset. This behavior is only required to support IEEE 802.1D switches. The RSTP BPDUs never have the TCA bit set. ■Propagation—When an RSTP switch receives a TC message from another switch through a designated or root port, it propagates the change to all of its nonedge, designated ports and to the root port (excluding the port on which it is received). The switch starts the TC-while timer for all such ports and flushes the information learned on them. ■Protocol migration—For backward compatibility with IEEE 802.1D switches, RSTP selectively sends IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDUs and TCN BPDUs on a per-port basis. When a port is initialized, the migrate-delay timer is started (specifies the minimum time during which RSTP BPDUs are sent), and RSTP BPDUs are sent. While this timer is active, the switch processes all BPDUs received on that port and ignores the protocol type. If the switch receives an IEEE 802.1D BPDU after the port migration-delay timer has expired, it assumes that it is connected to an IEEE 802.1D switch and starts using only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs. However, if the RSTP switch is using IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the timer has expired, it restarts the timer and starts using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
These are the configuration guidelines for MSTP: ■When you enable MST by using the spanning-tree mode mst global configuration command, RSTP is automatically enabled. ■For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance map, the same configuration revision number, and the same name. ■The switch supports up to 65 MST instances. The number of VLANs that can be mapped to a particular MST instance is unlimited. ■PVST+, rapid PVST+, and MSTP are supported, but only one version can be active at any time. (For example, all VLANs run PVST+, all VLANs run rapid PVST+, or all VLANs run MSTP.) For more information, see “Spanning-Tree Interoperability and Backward Compatibility” section on page 10. ■VTP propagation of the MST configuration is not supported. However, you can manually configure the MST configuration (region name, revision number, and VLAN-to-instance mapping) on each switch within the MST region by using the command-line interface (CLI) or through the SNMP support. ■For load balancing across redundant paths in the network to work, all VLAN-to-instance mapping assignments must match; otherwise, all traffic flows on a single link. ■All MST boundary ports must be forwarding for load balancing between a PVST+ and an MST cloud or between a rapid-PVST+ and an MST cloud. For this to occur, the IST master of the MST cloud should also be the root of the CST. If the MST cloud consists of multiple MST regions, one of the MST regions must contain the CST root, and all of the other MST regions must have a better path to the root contained within the MST cloud than a path through the PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ cloud. You might have to manually configure the switches in the clouds. ■Partitioning the network into a large number of regions is not recommended. However, if this situation is unavoidable, we recommend that you partition the switched LAN into smaller LANs interconnected by routers or non-Layer 2 devices. ■For configuration information about UplinkFast and BackboneFast, see “Information About Configuring the Optional Spanning-Tree Features” section on page 1. For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same name. A region can have one member or multiple members with the same MST configuration; each member must be capable of processing RSTP BPDUs. There is no limit to the number of MST regions in a network, but each region can only support up to 65 spanning-tree instances. You can assign a VLAN to only one spanning-tree instance at a time. The switch maintains a spanning-tree instance for the group of VLANs mapped to it. A switch ID, consisting of the switch priority and the switch MAC address, is associated with each instance. For a group of VLANs, the switch with the lowest switch ID becomes the root switch. To configure a switch to become the root, use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root global configuration command to modify the switch priority from the default value (32768) to a significantly lower value so that the switch becomes the root switch for the specified spanning-tree instance. When you enter this command, the switch checks the switch priorities of the root switches. Because of the extended system ID support, the switch sets its own priority for the specified instance to 24576 if this value will cause this switch to become the root for the specified spanning-tree instance. If any root switch for the specified instance has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its own priority to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the least-significant bit of a 4-bit switch priority value as shown in Table 1 on page 4.) If your network consists of switches that both do and do not support the extended system ID, it is unlikely that the switch with the extended system ID support will become the root switch. The extended system ID increases the switch priority value every time the VLAN number is greater than the priority of the connected switches running older software. The root switch for each spanning-tree instance should be a backbone or distribution switch. Do not configure an access switch as the spanning-tree primary root. Use the diameter keyword, which is available only for MST instance 0, to specify the Layer 2 network diameter (that is, the maximum number of switch hops between any two end stations in the Layer 2 network). When you specify the network diameter, the switch automatically sets an optimal hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time for a network of that diameter, which can significantly reduce the convergence time. You can use the hello keyword to override the automatically calculated hello time. When you configure a switch with the extended system ID support as the secondary root, the switch priority is modified from the default value (32768) to 28672. The switch is then likely to become the root switch for the specified instance if the primary root switch fails. This is assuming that the other network switches use the default switch priority of 32768 and therefore are unlikely to become the root switch. You can execute this command on more than one switch to configure multiple backup root switches. Use the same network diameter and hello-time values that you used when you configured the primary root switch with the spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary global configuration command. If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses the port priority when selecting an interface to put into the forwarding state. You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to interfaces that you want selected first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) that you want selected last. If all interfaces have the same priority value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces. The MSTP path cost default value is derived from the media speed of an interface. If a loop occurs, the MSTP uses cost when selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. You can assign lower cost values to interfaces that you want selected first and higher cost values that you want selected last. If all interfaces have the same cost value, the MSTP puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and blocks the other interfaces. If you connect a port to another port through a point-to-point link and the local port becomes a designated port, the RSTP negotiates a rapid transition with the other port by using the proposal-agreement handshake to ensure a loop-free topology as described in the Rapid Convergence, page 8. By default, the link type is controlled from the duplex mode of the interface: a full-duplex port is considered to have a point-to-point connection; a half-duplex port is considered to have a shared connection. If you have a half-duplex link physically connected point-to-point to a single port on a remote switch running MSTP, you can override the default setting of the link type and enable rapid transitions to the forwarding state. A topology could contain both prestandard and IEEE 802.1s standard compliant devices. By default, ports can automatically detect prestandard devices, but they can still receive both standard and prestandard BPDUs. When there is a mismatch between a device and its neighbor, only the CIST runs on the interface. You can choose to set a port to send only prestandard BPDUs. The prestandard flag appears in all the show commands, even if the port is in STP compatibility mode. A switch running MSTP supports a built-in protocol migration mechanism that enables it to interoperate with legacy IEEE 802.1D switches. If this switch receives a legacy IEEE 802.1D configuration BPDU (a BPDU with the protocol version set to 0), it sends only IEEE 802.1D BPDUs on that port. An MSTP switch also can detect that a port is at the boundary of a region when it receives a legacy BPDU, an MST BPDU (Version 3) associated with a different region, or an RST BPDU (Version 2). However, the switch does not automatically revert to the MSTP mode if it no longer receives IEEE 802.1D BPDUs because it cannot detect whether the legacy switch has been removed from the link unless the legacy switch is the designated switch. A switch also might continue to assign a boundary role to a port when the switch to which it is connected has joined the region. This task is required.
Before You Begin After configuring the switch as the root switch, we recommend that you avoid manually configuring the hello time, forward-delay time, and maximum-age time through the spanning-tree mst hello-time, spanning-tree mst forward-time, and the spanning-tree mst max-age global configuration commands. This task is optional.
Before You Begin Exercise care when configuring the switch priority. For most situations, we recommend that you use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root primary and the spanning-tree mst instance-id root secondary global configuration commands to modify the switch priority.
This example shows how to enter MST configuration mode, map VLANs 10 to 20 to MST instance 1, name the region region1, set the configuration revision to 1, display the pending configuration, apply the changes, and return to global configuration mode: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 9
This chapter describes how to use Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) to provide routing redundancy for routing IP traffic not dependent on the availability of any single router. HSRP for IPv4 is supported on switches running the IP services image. You can also use a version of HSRP in Layer 2 mode to configure a redundant command switch to take over cluster management if the cluster command switch fails. For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see these documents: This chapter consists of these sections: HSRP is Cisco’s standard method of providing high network availability by providing first-hop redundancy for IP hosts on an IEEE 802 LAN configured with a default gateway IP address. HSRP routes IP traffic without relying on the availability of any single router. It enables a set of router interfaces to work together to present the appearance of a single virtual router or default gateway to the hosts on a LAN. When HSRP is configured on a network or segment, it provides a virtual Media Access Control (MAC) address and an IP address that is shared among a group of configured routers. HSRP allows two or more HSRP-configured routers to use the MAC address and IP network address of a virtual router. The virtual router does not exist; it represents the common target for routers that are configured to provide backup to each other. One of the routers is selected to be the active router and another to be the standby router, which assumes control of the group MAC address and IP address should the designated active router fail. Note Routers in an HSRP group can be any router interface that supports HSRP, including routed ports and switch virtual interfaces (SVIs). HSRP provides high network availability by providing redundancy for IP traffic from hosts on networks. In a group of router interfaces, the active router is the router of choice for routing packets; the standby router is the router that takes over the routing duties when an active router fails or when preset conditions are met. HSRP is useful for hosts that do not support a router discovery protocol and cannot switch to a new router when their selected router reloads or loses power. When HSRP is configured on a network segment, it provides a virtual MAC address and an IP address that is shared among router interfaces in a group of router interfaces running HSRP. The router selected by the protocol to be the active router receives and routes packets destined for the group’s MAC address. For n routers running HSRP, there are n +1 IP and MAC addresses assigned. HSRP detects when the designated active router fails, and a selected standby router assumes control of the Hot Standby group’s MAC and IP addresses. A new standby router is also selected at that time. Devices running HSRP send and receive multicast UDP-based hello packets to detect router failure and to designate active and standby routers. When HSRP is configured on an interface, Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) redirect messages are disabled by default for the interface. You can configure multiple Hot Standby groups among switches that are operating in Layer 3 to make more use of the redundant routers. To do so, specify a group number for each Hot Standby command group you configure for an interface. For example, you might configure an interface on switch 1 as an active router and one on switch 2 as a standby router and also configure another interface on switch 2 as an active router with another interface on switch 1 as its standby router. Figure 49-96 shows a segment of a network configured for HSRP. Each router is configured with the MAC address and IP network address of the virtual router. Instead of configuring hosts on the network with the IP address of Router A, you configure them with the IP address of the virtual router as their default router. When Host C sends packets to Host B, it sends them to the MAC address of the virtual router. If for any reason, Router A stops transferring packets, Router B responds to the virtual IP address and virtual MAC address and becomes the active router, assuming the active router duties. Host C continues to use the IP address of the virtual router to address packets destined for Host B, which Router B now receives and sends to Host B. Until Router A resumes operation, HSRP allows Router B to provide uninterrupted service to users on Host C’s segment that need to communicate with users on Host B’s segment and also continues to perform its normal function of handling packets between the Host A segment and Host B. Figure 49-96 Typical HSRP Configuration The switch supports these Hot Standby Redundancy Protocol (HSRP) versions:
– The HSRP group number can be from 0 to 255. – HSRPv1 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.2 to send hello packets, which can conflict with Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) leave processing. You cannot enable HSRPv1 and CGMP at the same time; they are mutually exclusive.
– To match the HSRP group number to the VLAN ID of a subinterface, HSRPv2 can use a group number from 0 to 4095 and a MAC address from 0000.0C9F.F000 to 0000.0C9F.FFFF. – HSRPv2 uses the multicast address 224.0.0.102 to send hello packets. HSRPv2 and CGMP leave processing are no longer mutually exclusive, and both can be enabled at the same time. – HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HRSPv1. A switch running HSRPv1 cannot identify the physical router that sent a hello packet because the source MAC address of the router is the virtual MAC address. HSRPv2 has a different packet format than HSRPv1. A HSRPv2 packet uses the type-length-value (TLV) format and has a 6-byte identifier field with the MAC address of the physical router that sent the packet. If an interface running HSRPv1 gets an HSRPv2 packet, the type field is ignored. The switch supports Multiple HSRP (MHSRP), an extension of HSRP that allows load sharing between two or more HSRP groups. You can configure MHSRP to achieve load balancing and to use two or more standby groups (and paths) from a host network to a server network. In Figure 49-97, half the clients are configured for Router A, and half the clients are configured for Router B. Together, the configuration for Routers A and B establishes two HSRP groups. For group 1, Router A is the default active router because it has the assigned highest priority, and Router B is the standby router. For group 2, Router B is the default active router because it has the assigned highest priority, and Router A is the standby router. During normal operation, the two routers share the IP traffic load. When either router becomes unavailable, the other router becomes active and assumes the packet-transfer functions of the router that is unavailable. Note For MHSRP, you need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on the HSRP interfaces so that if a router fails and then comes back up, preemption restores load sharing. Figure 49-97 MHSRP Load Sharing These sections contain this configuration information: Table 49-62 shows the default HSRP configuration.
Follow these guidelines when configuring HSRP:
If you configure the same HSRP group number on multiple interfaces, the switch counts each interface as one instance: For example, if you configure HSRP group 0 on VLAN 1 and on port 1, the switch counts this as two instances.
– Routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by entering the no switchport interface configuration command. – SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id global configuration command and by default a Layer 3 interface. – EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port-channel-number global configuration command and binding the Ethernet interface into the channel group. For more information, see the “Configuring Layer 3 EtherChannels” section.
Examples of valid and invalid group numbers: – If you configure groups with the numbers 2, 150, and 225, you cannot configure another group with the number 3850. It is not in the range of 0 to 255. – If you configure groups with the numbers 520, 600, and 700, you cannot configure another group with the number 900. It is not in the range of 512 to 767.
The standby ip interface configuration command activates HSRP on the configured interface. If an IP address is specified, that address is used as the designated address for the Hot Standby group. If no IP address is specified, the address is learned through the standby function. You must configure at least one Layer 3 port on the LAN with the designated address. Configuring an IP address always overrides another designated address currently in use. When the standby ip command is enabled on an interface and proxy ARP is enabled, if the interface’s Hot Standby state is active, proxy ARP requests are answered using the Hot Standby group MAC address. If the interface is in a different state, proxy ARP responses are suppressed. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, follow these steps to create or enable HSRP on a Layer 3 interface:
Use the no standby [ group-number ] ip [ ip-address ] interface configuration command to disable HSRP. This example shows how to activate HSRP for group 1 on an interface. The IP address used by the hot standby group is learned by using HSRP. Note This procedure is the minimum number of steps required to enable HSRP. Other configuration is optional. The standby priority, standby preempt, and standby track interface configuration commands are all used to set characteristics for finding active and standby routers and behavior regarding when a new active router takes over. When configuring HSRP priority, follow these guidelines:
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP priority characteristics on an interface:
Use the no standby [ group-number ] priority priority [ preempt [ delay delay ]] and no standby [ group-number ] [ priority priority ] preempt [ delay delay ] interface configuration commands to restore default priority, preempt, and delay values. Use the no standby [ group-number ] track type number [ interface-priority ] interface configuration command to remove the tracking. This example activates a port, sets an IP address and a priority of 120 (higher than the default value), and waits for 300 seconds (5 minutes) before attempting to become the active router: To enable MHSRP and load balancing, you configure two routers as active routers for their groups, with virtual routers as standby routers. This example shows how to enable the MHSRP configuration shown in Figure 49-97. You need to enter the standby preempt interface configuration command on each HSRP interface so that if a router fails and comes back up, the preemption occurs and restores load balancing. Router A is configured as the active router for group 1, and Router B is configured as the active router for group 2. The HSRP interface for Router A has an IP address of 10.0.0.1 with a group 1 standby priority of 110 (the default is 100). The HSRP interface for Router B has an IP address of 10.0.0.2 with a group 2 standby priority of 110. Group 1 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.3 and group 2 uses a virtual IP address of 10.0.0.4. Router A Configuration Router B Configuration You can optionally configure an HSRP authentication string or change the hello-time interval and holdtime. When configuring these attributes, follow these guidelines:
Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use one or more of these steps to configure HSRP authentication and timers on an interface:
Use the no standby [ group-number ] authentication string interface configuration command to delete an authentication string. Use the no sta ndby [ group-number ] timers hellotime holdtime interface configuration command to restore timers to their default values. This example shows how to configure word as the authentication string required to allow Hot Standby routers in group 1 to interoperate: This example shows how to set the timers on standby group 1 with the time between hello packets at 5 seconds and the time after which a router is considered down to be 15 seconds: The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a network layer Internet protocol that provides message packets to report errors and other information relevant to IP processing. ICMP provides diagnostic functions, such as sending and directing error packets to the host. When the switch is running HSRP, make sure hosts do not discover the interface (or real) MAC addresses of routers in the HSRP group. If a host is redirected by ICMP to the real MAC address of a router and that router later fails, packets from the host will be lost. ICMP redirect messages are automatically enabled on interfaces configured with HSRP. This feature filters outgoing ICMP redirect messages through HSRP, in which the next hop IP address might be changed to an HSRP virtual IP address. When a device is participating in an HSRP standby routing and clustering is enabled, you can use the same standby group for command switch redundancy and HSRP redundancy. Use the cluster standby-group HSRP-group-name [ routing-redundancy ] global configuration command to enable the same HSRP standby group to be used for command switch and routing redundancy. If you create a cluster with the same HSRP standby group name without entering the routing-redundancy keyword, HSRP standby routing is disabled for the group. This example shows how to bind standby group my_hsrp to the cluster and enable the same HSRP group to be used for command switch redundancy and router redundancy. The command can only be executed on the cluster command switch. If the standby group name or number does not exist, or if the switch is a cluster member switch, an error message appears. If one of the situations in Table 49-63 occurs, this message appears:
From privileged EXEC mode, use this command to display HSRP settings: show standby [ interface-id [ group ]] [ brief ] [ detail ] You can display HSRP information for the whole switch, for a specific interface, for an HSRP group, or for an HSRP group on an interface. You can also specify whether to display a concise overview of HSRP information or detailed HSRP information. The default display is detail. If there are a large number of HSRP groups, using the show standby command without qualifiers can result in an unwieldy display. This is a an example of output from the show standby privileged EXEC command, displaying HSRP information for two standby groups (group 1 and group 100): The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) is an election protocol that dynamically assigns responsibility for one or more virtual routers to the VRRP routers on a LAN, allowing several routers on a multiaccess link to utilize the same virtual IP address. A VRRP router is configured to run the VRRP protocol in conjunction with one or more other routers attached to a LAN. In a VRRP configuration, one router is elected as the virtual router master, with the other routers acting as backups in case the virtual router master fails.
Page 10
This chapter describes how to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping and option-82 data insertion, and the DHCP server port-based address allocation features on the switch. It also describes how to configure the IP source guard feature. DHCP is widely used in LAN environments to dynamically assign host IP addresses from a centralized server, which significantly reduces the overhead of administration of IP addresses. DHCP also helps conserve the limited IP address space because IP addresses no longer need to be permanently assigned to hosts; only those hosts that are connected to the network consume IP addresses. The DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to DHCP clients and manages them. If the DHCP server cannot give the DHCP client the requested configuration parameters from its database, it forwards the request to one or more secondary DHCP servers defined by the network administrator. A DHCP relay agent is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers. Relay agents forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical subnet. Relay agent forwarding is different from the normal Layer 2 forwarding, in which IP datagrams are switched transparently between networks. Relay agents receive DHCP messages and generate new DHCP messages to send on output interfaces. DHCP snooping is a DHCP security feature that provides network security by filtering untrusted DHCP messages and by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding database, also referred to as a DHCP snooping binding table. DHCP snooping acts like a firewall between untrusted hosts and DHCP servers. You use DHCP snooping to differentiate between untrusted interfaces connected to the end user and trusted interfaces connected to the DHCP server or another switch. Note: For DHCP snooping to function properly, all DHCP servers must be connected to the switch through trusted interfaces. An untrusted DHCP message is a message that is received from outside the network or firewall. When you use DHCP snooping in a service-provider environment, an untrusted message is sent from a device that is not in the service-provider network, such as a customer’s switch. Messages from unknown devices are untrusted because they can be sources of traffic attacks. The DHCP snooping binding database has the MAC address, the IP address, the lease time, the binding type, the VLAN number, and the interface information that corresponds to the local untrusted interfaces of a switch. It does not have information regarding hosts interconnected with a trusted interface. In a service-provider network, a trusted interface is connected to a port on a device in the same network. An untrusted interface is connected to an untrusted interface in the network or to an interface on a device that is not in the network. When a switch receives a packet on an untrusted interface and the interface belongs to a VLAN in which DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch compares the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address. If the addresses match (the default), the switch forwards the packet. If the addresses do not match, the switch drops the packet. The switch drops a DHCP packet when one of these situations occurs: ■A packet from a DHCP server, such as a DHCPOFFER, DHCPACK, DHCPNAK, or DHCPLEASEQUERY packet, is received from outside the network or firewall. ■A packet is received on an untrusted interface, and the source MAC address and the DHCP client hardware address do not match. ■The switch receives a DHCPRELEASE or DHCPDECLINE broadcast message that has a MAC address in the DHCP snooping binding database, but the interface information in the binding database does not match the interface on which the message was received. ■A DHCP relay agent forwards a DHCP packet that includes a relay-agent IP address that is not 0.0.0.0, or the relay agent forwards a packet that includes option-82 information to an untrusted port. If the switch is an aggregation switch supporting DHCP snooping and is connected to an edge switch that is inserting DHCP option-82 information, the switch drops packets with option-82 information when packets are received on an untrusted interface. If DHCP snooping is enabled and packets are received on a trusted port, the aggregation switch does not learn the DHCP snooping bindings for connected devices and cannot build a complete DHCP snooping binding database. When an aggregation switch can be connected to an edge switch through an untrusted interface and you enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted global configuration command, the aggregation switch accepts packets with option-82 information from the edge switch. The aggregation switch learns the bindings for hosts connected through an untrusted switch interface. The DHCP security features, such as dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard, can still be enabled on the aggregation switch while the switch receives packets with option-82 information on untrusted input interfaces to which hosts are connected. The port on the edge switch that connects to the aggregation switch must be configured as a trusted interface. In residential, metropolitan Ethernet-access environments, DHCP can centrally manage the IP address assignments for a large number of subscribers. When the DHCP option-82 feature is enabled on the switch, a subscriber device is identified by the switch port through which it connects to the network (in addition to its MAC address). Multiple hosts on the subscriber LAN can be connected to the same port on the access switch and are uniquely identified. Note: The DHCP option-82 feature is supported only when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and on the VLANs to which subscriber devices using this feature are assigned. Figure 60 is an example of a metropolitan Ethernet network in which a centralized DHCP server assigns IP addresses to subscribers connected to the switch at the access layer. Because the DHCP clients and their associated DHCP server do not reside on the same IP network or subnet, a DHCP relay agent (the Catalyst switch) is configured with a helper address to enable broadcast forwarding and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server. Figure 60 DHCP Relay Agent in a Metropolitan Ethernet Network When you enable the DHCP snooping information option-82 on the switch, this sequence of events occurs: ■The host (DHCP client) generates a DHCP request and broadcasts it on the network. ■When the switch receives the DHCP request, it adds the option-82 information in the packet. By default, the remote-ID suboption is the switch MAC address, and the circuit-ID suboption is the port identifier, vlan-mod-port, from which the packet is received. ■If the IP address of the relay agent is configured, the switch adds this IP address in the DHCP packet. ■The switch forwards the DHCP request that includes the option-82 field to the DHCP server. ■The DHCP server receives the packet. If the server is option-82-capable, it can use the remote ID, the circuit ID, or both to assign IP addresses and implement policies, such as restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID. The DHCP server then repeats the option-82 field in the DHCP reply. ■The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the switch if the request was relayed to the server by the switch. The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option-82 data by inspecting the remote ID and possibly the circuit ID fields. The switch removes the option-82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request. In the default suboption configuration, when the described sequence of events occurs, the values in these fields in Figure 61 do not change: ■Circuit-ID suboption fields –Suboption type –Length of the suboption type –Circuit-ID type –Length of the circuit-ID type ■Remote-ID suboption fields –Suboption type –Length of the suboption type –Remote-ID type –Length of the remote-ID type In the port field of the circuit-ID suboption, the port numbers start at 3. Figure 61 shows the packet formats for the remote-ID suboption and the circuit-ID suboption when the default suboption configuration is used. The switch uses the packet formats when you globally enable DHCP snooping and enter the ip dhcp snooping information option global configuration command. Figure 61 Suboption Packet Formats shows the packet formats for user-configured remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions The switch uses these packet formats when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and when the ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id global configuration command and the ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string interface configuration command are entered. The values for these fields in the packets change from the default values when you configure the remote-ID and circuit-ID suboptions: ■Circuit-ID suboption fields –The circuit-ID type is 1. –The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure. ■Remote-ID suboption fields –The remote-ID type is 1. –The length values are variable, depending on the length of the string that you configure. Figure 62 User-Configured Suboption Packet Formats During the DHCP-based autoconfiguration process, the designated DHCP server uses the Cisco IOS DHCP server database. It has IP addresses, address bindings, and configuration parameters, such as the boot file. An address binding is a mapping between an IP address and a MAC address of a host in the Cisco IOS DHCP server database. You can manually assign the client IP address, or the DHCP server can allocate an IP address from a DHCP address pool. When DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces. The database can have up to 8192 bindings. Each database entry ( binding) has an IP address, an associated MAC address, the lease time (in hexadecimal format), the interface to which the binding applies, and the VLAN to which the interface belongs. The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location. At the end of each entry is a checksum that accounts for all the bytes from the start of the file through all the bytes associated with the entry. Each entry is 72 bytes, followed by a space and then the checksum value. To keep the bindings when the switch reloads, you must use the DHCP snooping database agent. If the agent is disabled, dynamic ARP inspection or IP source guard is enabled, and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings, the switch loses its connectivity. If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled, the switch does not lose its connectivity, but DHCP snooping might not prevent DHCP spoofing attacks. When reloading, the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database. The switch updates the file when the database changes. When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings, the switch immediately updates the entries in the database. The switch also updates the entries in the binding file. The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay, and the updates are batched. If the file is not updated in a specified time (set by the write-delay and abort-timeout values), the update stops. This is the format of the file with bindings: Each entry in the file is tagged with a checksum value that the switch uses to verify the entries when it reads the file. The initial-checksum entry on the first line distinguishes entries associated with the latest file update from entries associated with a previous file update. This is an example of a binding file: When the switch starts and the calculated checksum value equals the stored checksum value, the switch reads entries from the binding file and adds the bindings to its DHCP snooping binding database. The switch ignores an entry when one of these situations occurs: ■The switch reads the entry and the calculated checksum value does not equal the stored checksum value. The entry and the ones following it are ignored. ■An entry has an expired lease time (the switch might not remove a binding entry when the lease time expires). ■The interface in the entry no longer exists on the system. ■The interface is a routed interface or a DHCP snooping-trusted interface.
■You must globally enable DHCP snooping on the switch. ■DHCP snooping is not active until DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN. ■Before globally enabling DHCP snooping on the switch, make sure that the devices acting as the DHCP server and the DHCP relay agent are configured and enabled. ■Before configuring the DHCP snooping information option on your switch, be sure to configure the device that is acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign or exclude, or you must configure DHCP options for these devices. ■When configuring a large number of circuit IDs on a switch, consider the impact of lengthy character serstrings on the NVRAM or the flash memory. If the circuit-ID configurations, combined with other data, exceed the capacity of the NVRAM or the flash memory, an error message appears. ■Before configuring the DHCP relay agent on your switch, make sure to configure the device that is acting as the DHCP server. For example, you must specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign or exclude, configure DHCP options for devices, or set up the DHCP database agent. ■If the DHCP relay agent is enabled but DHCP snooping is disabled, the DHCP option-82 data insertion feature is not supported. ■If a switch port is connected to a DHCP server, configure a port as trusted by entering the ip dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command. ■If a switch port is connected to a DHCP client, configure a port as untrusted by entering the no ip dhcp snooping trust interface configuration command. ■Do not enter the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted command on an aggregation switch to which an untrusted device is connected. If you enter this command, an untrusted device might spoof the option-82 information. ■You can display DHCP snooping statistics by entering the show ip dhcp snooping statistics user EXEC command, and you can clear the snooping statistics counters by entering the clear ip dhcp snooping statistics privileged EXEC command. Note: Do not enable DHCP snooping on RSPAN VLANs. If DHCP snooping is enabled on RSPAN VLANs, DHCP packets might not reach the RSPAN destination port. ■Because both NVRAM and the flash memory have limited storage capacity, we recommend that you store the binding file on a TFTP server. ■For network-based URLs (such as TFTP and FTP), you must create an empty file at the configured URL before the switch can write bindings to the binding file at that URL. See the documentation for your TFTP server to determine whether you must first create an empty file on the server; some TFTP servers cannot be configured this way. ■To ensure that the lease time in the database is accurate, we recommend that you enable and configure NTP. For more information, see Configuring Time and Date Manually. ■If NTP is configured, the switch writes binding changes to the binding file only when the switch system clock is synchronized with NTP. If the DHCP server and the DHCP clients are on different networks or subnets, you must configure the switch with the ip helper-address address interface configuration command. The general rule is to configure the command on the Layer 3 interface closest to the client. The address used in the ip helper-address command can be a specific DHCP server IP address, or it can be the network address if other DHCP servers are on the destination network segment. Using the network address enables any DHCP server to respond to requests. DHCP server port-based address allocation is a feature that enables DHCP to maintain the same IP address on an Ethernet switch port regardless of the attached device client identifier or client hardware address. When Ethernet switches are deployed in the network, they offer connectivity to the directly connected devices. In some environments, such as on a factory floor, if a device fails, the replacement device must be working immediately in the existing network. With the current DHCP implementation, there is no guarantee that DHCP would offer the same IP address to the replacement device. Control, monitoring, and other software expect a stable IP address associated with each device. If a device is replaced, the address assignment should remain stable even though the DHCP client has changed. When configured, the DHCP server port-based address allocation feature ensures that the same IP address is always offered to the same connected port even as the client identifier or client hardware address changes in the DHCP messages received on that port. The DHCP protocol recognizes DHCP clients by the client identifier option in the DHCP packet. Clients that do not include the client identifier option are identified by the client hardware address. When you configure this feature, the port name of the interface overrides the client identifier or hardware address and the actual point of connection, the switch port, becomes the client identifier. In all cases, by connecting the Ethernet cable to the same port, the same IP address is allocated through DHCP to the attached device. The DHCP server port-based address allocation feature is only supported on a Cisco IOS DHCP server and not a third-party server. By default, DHCP server port-based address allocation is disabled. These are the configuration guidelines for DHCP port-based address allocation: ■Only one IP address can be assigned per port. ■Reserved addresses (preassigned) cannot be cleared by using the clear ip dhcp binding global configuration command. ■Preassigned addresses are automatically excluded from normal dynamic IP address assignment. Preassigned addresses cannot be used in host pools, but there can be multiple preassigned addresses per DHCP address pool. ■To restrict assignments from the DHCP pool to preconfigured reservations (unreserved addresses are not offered to the client and other clients are not served by the pool), you can enter the reserved-only DHCP pool configuration command.
After enabling DHCP port-based address allocation on the switch, use the ip dhcp pool global configuration command to preassign IP addresses and to associate them to clients. To restrict assignments from the DHCP pool to preconfigured reservations, you can enter the reserved-only DHCP pool configuration command. Unreserved addresses that are part of the network or on pool ranges are not offered to the client, and other clients are not served by the pool. By entering this command, users can configure a group of switches with DHCP pools that share a common IP subnet and that ignore requests from clients of other switches.
In this example, a subscriber identifier is automatically generated, and the DHCP server ignores any client identifier fields in the DHCP messages and uses the subscriber identifier instead. The subscriber identifier is based on the short name of the interface and the client preassigned IP address 10.1.1.7. This example shows that the preassigned address was correctly reserved in the DHCP pool: This example shows how to enable DHCP snooping globally and on VLAN 10 and to configure a rate limit of 100 packets per second on a port: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 11
Media Access Control Security (MACsec) is the IEEE 802.1AE standard for authenticating and encrypting packets between two MACsec-capable devices. For information about MACsec, including details about MACsec and MACsec Key Agreement (MKA), how to configure MKA and MACsec, and how to configure Cisco TrustSec MACsec, see Configuring MACsec Encryption. This chapter includes the following information about MACsec specific to the IE 4000, IE 4010, and IE 5000 switches: ■PSK Based MKA Support for MACsec ■Certificate-based MACsec Encryption Note: On the IE 4000, IE 4010, and the IE 5000, MACsec is included in the IP Services image only. MACsec on the IE5000 has the following guidelines and limitations: ■Both models of IE 5000 downlinks are fully interoperable with IE 4000, IE 4010, Catalyst 9300/3850, and Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms. ■On the IE-5000-16S12P, uplinks are fully functional when connected to another IE-5000-16S12P or a Catalyst 3850. ■On the IE-5000-12S12P-10G, uplinks when running at 10GE are fully functional when connected to another IE-5000-12S12P-10G running at 10GE or to a Catalyst 3850 running at 10GE. ■When an IE 5000 uplink is connected to a Catalyst 9300, the IE 5000 must be the key server. CSCvs36043 ■IE-5000-12S12P-10G uplinks MACsec is not currently supported at GE speeds. CSCvs41335 ■IE-5000-16S12P uplinks connected to downlinks of the IE 5000 and IE 4000 is not currently supported. CSCvs44292 To interoperate with Cisco switches running IOS XE, the CKN configuration must be zero-padded. From Cisco IOS XE Everest Release 16.6.1 onwards, for MKA-PSK sessions, instead of fixed 32 bytes, the Connectivity Association Key name (CKN) uses exactly the same string as the CKN, which is configured as the hex-string for the key. Example configuration: For the above example, following is the output for the show mka session command: Note that the CKN key-string is exactly the same that has been configured for the key as hex-string. For interoperability between two images, one having the CKN behavior change and one without the CKN behavior change, the hex-string for the key must be a 64-character hex-string padded with zeros to work on a device that has an image with the CKN behavior change. See the example below: Configuration without CKN key-string behavior change: Output: Configuration with CKN key-string behavior change: Output: This section provides information about configuring pre-shared key (PSK) based MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) MACsec encryption on the switch. This feature applies to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(7)E1a and later. IE switches support Pairwise Master Key (PMK) Security Association Protocol (SAP) based support for MACsec to interconnect links between the switches. The PMK keys can be either derived statically from the switch configuration (manual mode) or derived from the RADIUS server during dot1X negotiation (dynamic mode). Manual mode does not support switch-to-host MACsec connections because SAP is a Cisco proprietary protocol. IE switches have MKA support for MACSec on switch-to-host links. Here the keys are derived from the RADIUS server after dot1x authentication. However, manually configured PSK keys were not supported on IE switch platforms (running Cisco IOS) prior to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(7)E1a. Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms (running Cisco IOS XE) have PSK based MKA support for MACsec for statically derived keys from the switch configuration for switch-to-switch connections as well as dynamically derived keys from RADIUS server for switch-to-host links. Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms do not have PMK SAP based support for MACsec. Therefore, for interoperability with the Catalyst IE 3x00 platforms, the PSK functionality is added to MACsec for Cisco IOS based IE switches. Follow the procedures in this section to configure PSK based MKA on IE 4000, IE 4010, and IE 5000 switches. The MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) enables configuration and control of keying parameters. Perform the following task to configure MKA.
You can use the show mka policy command to verify the configuration. Here's a sample output of the show command. Perform the following task to configure MACsec and MKA on an interface.
Perform the following task to configure MACsec Key Agreement (MKA) pre-shared key.
This section provides information about Certificate-based MACsec Encryption. This feature applies to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(8)E and later. ■Certificate-based MACsec Encryption is supported on the IE4000, IE4010, and IE5000. ■Ensure that you have a Certificate Authority (CA) server configured for your network. ■Generate a CA certificate. ■Ensure that you have configured Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) Release 2.0. Refer to the Cisco Identity Services Engine Administrator Guide, Release 2.3. ■Ensure that both the participating devices, the CA server, and Cisco Identity Services Engine (ISE) are synchronized using Network Time Protocol (NTP). If time is not synchronized on all your devices, certificates will not be validated. ■Ensure that 802.1x authentication and AAA are configured on your device. ■MKA is not supported on port-channels. ■High Availability for MKA is not supported. ■When you remove dot1x pae both from an interface, all configuration related to dot1x is removed from the interface. ■Certificate-based MACsec is supported only if the access-session host-mode is configured in multiple-host mode. The other configuration modes (multi-auth, multi-domain, or single-host) are not supported. MKA MACsec is supported on switch-to-switch links. Using IEEE 802.1X Port-based Authentication with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP-TLS), you can configure MKA MACsec between device ports. EAP-TLS allows mutual authentication and obtains an MSK (master session key) from which the connectivity association key (CAK) is derived for MKA protocol. Device certificates are carried, using EAP-TLS, for authentication to the AAA server. Refer to Certificate-based MACsec Encryption For more information about Certificate-based MACsec Encryption, including how to configure Certificate-based MACsec Encryption using Remote Authentication. Follow these procedures to configure MACsec encryption using remote authentication: ■Configure Certificate Enrollment Manually ■Configure an Authentication Policy ■Configure EAP-TLS Profiles and IEEE 802.1x Credentials ■Configure MKA MACsec using EAP-TLS on Interfaces If network connection between the router and CA is not possible, perform the following task to set up manual certificate enrollment:
To apply MKA MACsec using EAP-TLS to interfaces, perform the following task:
Use the following show commands to verify the configuration of certificate-based MACsec encryption. Sample output is shown below. The show access-session interface interface-id details displays detailed information about the access session for the given interface. Configure Crypto PKI Trustpoint: Manual Installation of Root CA certificate: Page 12
The switch software monitors switch conditions on a per-port or a switch basis. If the conditions present on the switch or a port do not match the set parameters, the switch software triggers an alarm or a system message. By default, the switch software sends the system messages to a system message logging facility, or a syslog facility. You can also configure the switch to send Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps to an SNMP server. The switch processes alarms related to temperature and power supply conditions, referred to as global or facility alarms.
The Ethernet standard calls for a maximum bit-error rate of 10-8. The bit error-rate range is from 10-6 to 10-11. The bit error-rate input to the switch is a positive exponent. If you want to configure the bit error-rate of 10-9, enter the value 9 for the exponent. By default, the FCS bit error-rate is 10-8. You can set the FCS error hysteresis threshold to prevent the toggle of the alarm when the actual bit-error rate fluctuates near the configured rate. The hysteresis threshold is defined as the ratio between the alarm clear threshold to the alarm set threshold, expressed as a percentage value. For example, if the FCS bit error-rate alarm value is configured to 10–8, that value is the alarm set threshold. To set the alarm clear threshold at 5*10-10, the hysteresis, value h, is determined as follows: h = alarm clear threshold / alarm set threshold h = 5*10-10 / 10-8 = 5*10-2 = 0.05 = 5 percent The FCS hysteresis threshold is applied to all ports on the switch. The allowable range is from 1 to 10 percent. The default value is 10 percent. See Configuring the FCS Bit Error Rate Alarm for more information. The switch can also monitor the status of the Ethernet ports and generate alarm messages based on the alarms listed in Table 11. To save user time and effort, it supports changeable alarm configurations by using alarm profiles. You can create a number of profiles and assign one of these profiles to each Ethernet port. Alarm profiles provide a mechanism for you to enable or disable alarm conditions for a port and associate the alarm conditions with one or both alarm relays. You can also use alarm profiles to set alarm conditions to send alarm traps to an SNMP server and system messages to a syslog server. The alarm profile defaultPort is applied to all interfaces in the factory configuration (by default). Note: You can associate multiple alarms to one relay or one alarm to both relays. Table 11 lists the port status monitoring alarms and their descriptions and functions. Each fault condition is assigned a severity level based on the Cisco IOS System Error Message Severity Level.
The switch supports these methods for triggering alarms: ■Configurable Relay The switch is equipped with one independent alarm relay that can be triggered by alarms for global, port status and SD flash card conditions. You can configure the relay to send a fault signal to an external alarm device, such as a bell, light, or other signaling device. You can associate any alarm condition with the alarm relay. Each fault condition is assigned a severity level based on the Cisco IOS System Error Message Severity Level. See Configuring the Power Supply Alarms for more information on configuring the relay. ■SNMP Traps SNMP is an application-layer protocol that provides a message format for communication between managers and agents. The SNMP system consists of an SNMP manager, an SNMP agent, and a management information base (MIB). The snmp-server enable traps command can be changed so that the user can send alarm traps to an SNMP server. You can use alarm profiles to set environmental or port status alarm conditions to send SNMP alarm traps. See Enabling SNMP Traps for more information. ■Syslog Messages You can use alarm profiles to send system messages to a syslog server. See Configuring the Power Supply Alarms for more information.
By default, the primary temperature alarm is associated to the relay. You can use the alarm facility temperature global configuration command to associate the primary temperature alarm to an SNMP trap, or a syslog message, or to associate the secondary temperature alarm to the relay, an SNMP trap, or a syslog message. Note: The single relay on the switch is called the major relay.
The switch generates an FCS bit error-rate alarm when the actual rate is close to the configured rate.
The hysteresis setting prevents the toggle of an alarm when the actual bit error-rate fluctuates near the configured rate. The FCS hysteresis threshold is applied to all ports of a switch.
You can use the alarm profile global configuration command to create an alarm profile or to modify an existing profile. When you create a new alarm profile, none of the alarms are enabled. Note: The only alarm enabled in the defaultPort profile is the Port not operating alarm.
You can modify an alarm profile from alarm profile configuration mode. You can enter more than one alarm type separated by a space.
This example configures alarm input 1 named door sensor to assert a major alarm when the door circuit is closed and then displays the status and configuration for all alarms: This example sets the secondary temperature alarm to the major relay, with a high temperature threshold value of 113oF (45oC). All alarms and traps associated with this alarm are sent to a syslog server and an SNMP server. This example sets the first (primary) temperature alarm to the major relay. All alarms and traps associated with this alarm are sent to a syslog server. This example shows how to configure two power supplies: These examples show how to display information when two power supplies are not present which results in a triggered alarm. The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 13
A VLAN is a switched network that is logically segmented by function, project team, or application, without regard to the physical locations of the users. VLANs have the same attributes as physical LANs, but you can group end stations even if they are not physically located on the same LAN segment. Any switch port can belong to a VLAN, and unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets are forwarded and flooded only to end stations in the VLAN. Each VLAN is considered a logical network, and packets destined for stations that do not belong to the VLAN must be forwarded through a router or a switch supporting fallback bridging, as shown in Figure 29. Because a VLAN is considered a separate logical network, it contains its own bridge Management Information Base (MIB) information and can support its own implementation of spanning tree. See Configuring STP Note: Before you create VLANs, you must decide whether to use VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) to maintain global VLAN configuration for your network. Figure 29 VLANs as Logically Defined Networks VLANs are often associated with IP subnetworks. For example, all the end stations in a particular IP subnet belong to the same VLAN. Interface VLAN membership on the switch is assigned manually on an interface-by-interface basis. When you assign switch interfaces to VLANs by using this method, it is known as interface-based, or static, VLAN membership. Traffic between VLANs must be routed or fallback bridged. The switch can route traffic between VLANs by using switch virtual interfaces (SVIs). An SVI must be explicitly configured and assigned an IP address to route traffic between VLANs. Note: If you plan to configure many VLANs on the switch and to not enable routing, you can use the sdm prefer vlan global configuration command to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to the VLAN template, which configures system resources to support the maximum number of unicast MAC addresses. For more information on the SDM templates, see Configuring SDM Templates The switch supports VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes. VLANs are identified by a number from 1 to 4096. VLAN IDs 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs. VTP version 1 and version 2 support only normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005). In these versions, the switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create VLAN IDs from 1006 to 4096. This release supports VTP version 3. VTP version 3 supports the entire VLAN range (VLANs 1 to 4096). Extended range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4096) are supported only in VTP version 3. You cannot convert from VTP version 3 to VTP version 2 if extended VLANs are configured in the domain. Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal range and extended range) VLANs, the number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware. The switch supports per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) or rapid PVST+ with a maximum of 128 spanning-tree instances. One spanning-tree instance is allowed per VLAN. See Normal-Range VLAN Configuration Guidelines for more information about the number of spanning-tree instances and the number of VLANs. You configure a port to belong to a VLAN by assigning a membership mode that specifies the kind of traffic the port carries and the number of VLANs to which it can belong. Table 33 lists the membership modes and membership and VTP characteristics. Table 33 Port Membership Modes and Characteristics
For more detailed definitions of access and trunk modes and their functions, see Table 35. When a port belongs to a VLAN, the switch learns and manages the addresses associated with the port on a per-VLAN basis. For more information, see Changing the Address Aging Time. Normal-range VLANs are VLANs with VLAN IDs 1 to 1005. If the switch is in VTP server or VTP transparent mode, you can add, modify or remove configurations for VLANs 2 to 1001 in the VLAN database. (VLAN IDs 1 and 1002 to 1005 are automatically created and cannot be removed.) Configurations for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are written to the vlan.dat file (VLAN database), and you can display them by entering the show vlan privileged EXEC command. The vlan.dat file is stored in flash memory. Caution: You can cause inconsistency in the VLAN database if you attempt to manually delete the vlan.dat file. If you want to modify the VLAN configuration, use the commands described in these sections. You use the interface configuration mode to define the port membership mode and to add and remove ports from VLANs. The results of these commands are written to the running-configuration file, and you can display the file by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command. You can set these parameters when you create a new normal-range VLAN or modify an existing VLAN in the VLAN database: ■VLAN ID ■VLAN name ■VLAN type (Ethernet, Fiber Distributed Data Interface [FDDI], FDDI network entity title [NET], TrBRF, or TrCRF, Token Ring, Token Ring-Net) ■VLAN state (active or suspended) ■Maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the VLAN ■Security Association Identifier (SAID) ■Bridge identification number for TrBRF VLANs ■Ring number for FDDI and TrCRF VLANs ■Parent VLAN number for TrCRF VLANs ■Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) type for TrCRF VLANs ■VLAN number to use when translating from one VLAN type to another You configure VLANs in vlan global configuration command by entering a VLAN ID. Enter a new VLAN ID to create a VLAN, or enter an existing VLAN ID to modify that VLAN. You can use the default VLAN configuration (Table 34) or enter multiple commands to configure the VLAN. When you have finished the configuration, you must exit VLAN configuration mode for the configuration to take effect. To display the VLAN configuration, enter the show vlan privileged EXEC command. The configurations of VLAN IDs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database (vlan.dat file). If the VTP mode is transparent, they are also saved in the switch running configuration file. You can enter the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command to save the configuration in the startup configuration file. To display the VLAN configuration, enter the show vlan privileged EXEC command. When you save VLAN and VTP information (including extended-range VLAN configuration information) in the startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the switch configuration is selected as follows: ■If the VTP mode is transparent in the startup configuration, and the VLAN database and the VTP domain name from the VLAN database matches that in the startup configuration file, the VLAN database is ignored (cleared), and the VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database. ■If the VTP mode or domain name in the startup configuration does not match the VLAN database, the domain name and VTP mode and configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information. ■In VTP versions 1 and 2, if VTP mode is server, the domain name and VLAN configuration for only the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information. VTP version 3 also supports VLANs 1006 to 4096. Although the switch does not support Token Ring connections, a remote device such as a Catalyst 6500 series switch with Token Ring connections could be managed from one of the supported switches. Switches running VTP Version 2 advertise information about these Token Ring VLANs: ■Token Ring TrBRF VLANs ■Token Ring TrCRF VLANs For more information on configuring Token Ring VLANs, see the Catalyst 6500 Series Software Configuration Guide. Follow these guidelines when creating and modifying normal-range VLANs in your network: ■The switch supports 1005 VLANs in VTP client, server, and transparent modes. ■Normal-range VLANs are identified with a number between 1 and 1001. VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs. ■VLAN configuration for VLANs 1 to 1005 are always saved in the VLAN database. If the VTP mode is transparent, VTP and VLAN configuration are also saved in the switch running configuration file. ■With VTP versions 1 and 2, the switch supports VLAN IDs 1006 through 4096 only in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled). These are extended-range VLANs and configuration options are limited. Extended-range VLANs created in VTP transparent mode are not saved in the VLAN database and are not propagated. VTP version 3 supports extended range VLAN (VLANs 1006 to 4096) database propagation. If extended VLANs are configured, you cannot convert from VTP version 3 to version 1 or 2. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN. ■Before you can create a VLAN, the switch must be in VTP server mode or VTP transparent mode. If the switch is a VTP server, you must define a VTP domain or VTP will not function. ■The switch does not support Token Ring or FDDI media. The switch does not forward FDDI, FDDI-Net, TrCRF, or TrBRF traffic, but it does propagate the VLAN configuration through VTP. ■The switch supports 128 spanning-tree instances. If a switch has more active VLANs than supported spanning-tree instances, spanning tree can be enabled on 128 VLANs and is disabled on the remaining VLANs. If you have already used all available spanning-tree instances on a switch, adding another VLAN anywhere in the VTP domain creates a VLAN on that switch that is not running spanning-tree. If you have the default allowed list on the trunk ports of that switch (which is to allow all VLANs), the new VLAN is carried on all trunk ports. Depending on the topology of the network, this could create a loop in the new VLAN that would not be broken, particularly if there are several adjacent switches that all have run out of spanning-tree instances. You can prevent this possibility by setting allowed lists on the trunk ports of switches that have used up their allocation of spanning-tree instances. If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the number of supported spanning-tree instances, we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance. For more information about MSTP, see Configuring MSTP Note: The switch supports Ethernet interfaces exclusively. Because FDDI and Token Ring VLANs are not locally supported, you only configure FDDI and Token Ring media-specific characteristics for VTP global advertisements to other switches.
Each Ethernet VLAN in the VLAN database has a unique, 4-digit ID that can be a number from 1 to 1001. VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs. To create a normal-range VLAN to be added to the VLAN database, assign a number and name to the VLAN. Note: With VTP version 1 and 2, if the switch is in VTP transparent mode, you can assign VLAN IDs greater than 1006, but they are not added to the VLAN database. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN. For the list of default parameters that are assigned when you add a VLAN, see Normal-Range VLANs. When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in VTP server mode, the VLAN is removed from the VLAN database for all switches in the VTP domain. When you delete a VLAN from a switch that is in VTP transparent mode, the VLAN is deleted only on that specific switch. You cannot delete the default VLANs for the different media types: Ethernet VLAN 1 and FDDI or Token Ring VLANs 1002 to 1005. Caution: When you delete a VLAN, any ports assigned to that VLAN become inactive. They remain associated with the VLAN (and thus inactive) until you assign them to a new VLAN. You can assign a static-access port to a VLAN without having VTP globally propagate VLAN configuration information by disabling VTP (VTP transparent mode). If you are assigning a port on a cluster member switch to a VLAN, first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch. Note: If you assign an interface to a VLAN that does not exist, the new VLAN is created. (See Creating or Modifying an Ethernet VLAN.) With VTP version 1 and version 2, when the switch is in VTP transparent mode (VTP disabled), you can create extended-range VLANs (in the range 1006 to 4096). VTP version supports extended-range VLANs in server or transparent move. Extended-range VLANs enable service providers to extend their infrastructure to a greater number of customers. The extended-range VLAN IDs are allowed for any switchport commands that allow VLAN IDs. With VTP version 1 or 2, extended-range VLAN configurations are not stored in the VLAN database, but because VTP mode is transparent, they are stored in the switch running configuration file, and you can save the configuration in the startup configuration file by using the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Extended-range VLANs created in VTP version 3 are stored in the VLAN database. See Table 34 for the default configuration for Ethernet VLANs. You can change only the MTU size, private VLAN, and the remote SPAN configuration state on extended-range VLANs; all other characteristics must remain at the default state. Follow these guidelines when creating extended-range VLANs: ■VLAN IDs in the extended range are not saved in the VLAN database and are not recognized by VTP unless the switch is running VTP version 3. ■You cannot include extended-range VLANs in the pruning eligible range. ■In VTP version 1 and 2, a switch must be in VTP transparent mode when you create extended-range VLANs. If VTP mode is server or client, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected. VTP version 3 supports extended VLANs in server and transparent modes. ■For VTP version 1 or 2, you can set the VTP mode to transparent in global configuration mode. See Adding a VTP Client Switch to a VTP Domain. You should save this configuration to the startup configuration so that the switch boots up in VTP transparent mode. Otherwise, you lose the extended-range VLAN configuration if the switch resets. If you create extended-range VLANs in VTP version 3, you cannot convert to VTP version 1 or 2. ■STP is enabled by default on extended-range VLANs, but you can disable it by using the no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id global configuration command. When the maximum number of spanning-tree instances are on the switch, spanning tree is disabled on any newly created VLANs. If the number of VLANs on the switch exceeds the maximum number of spanning-tree instances, we recommend that you configure the IEEE 802.1s Multiple STP (MSTP) on your switch to map multiple VLANs to a single spanning-tree instance. ■Each routed port on the switch creates an internal VLAN for its use. These internal VLANs use extended-range VLAN numbers, and the internal VLAN ID cannot be used for an extended-range VLAN. If you try to create an extended-range VLAN with a VLAN ID that is already allocated as an internal VLAN, an error message is generated, and the command is rejected. –Because internal VLAN IDs are in the lower part of the extended range, we recommend that you create extended-range VLANs beginning from the highest number (4096) and moving to the lowest (1006) to reduce the possibility of using an internal VLAN ID. –Before configuring extended-range VLANs, enter the show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command to see which VLANs have been allocated as internal VLANs. –If necessary, you can shut down the routed port assigned to the internal VLAN, which frees up the internal VLAN, and then create the extended-range VLAN and re-enable the port, which then uses another VLAN as its internal VLAN. See Creating an Extended-Range VLAN with an Internal VLAN ID. ■Although the switch supports a total of 1005 (normal-range and extended-range) VLANs, the number of routed ports, SVIs, and other configured features affects the use of the switch hardware. If you try to create an extended-range VLAN and there are not enough hardware resources available, an error message is generated, and the extended-range VLAN is rejected. A trunk is a point-to-point link between one or more Ethernet switch interfaces and another networking device such as a router or a switch. Ethernet trunks carry the traffic of multiple VLANs over a single link, and you can extend the VLANs across an entire network. You can configure a trunk on a single Ethernet interface or on an EtherChannel bundle. Ethernet trunk interfaces support different trunking modes (see Table 35). You can set an interface as trunking or nontrunking or to negotiate trunking with the neighboring interface. To autonegotiate trunking, the interfaces must be in the same VTP domain. Trunk negotiation is managed by the Dynamic Trunking Protocol ( DTP), which is a Point-to-Point Protocol. However, some internetworking devices might forward DTP frames improperly, which could cause misconfigurations. To avoid this, you should configure interfaces connected to devices that do not support DTP to not forward DTP frames, that is, to turn off DTP. ■If you do not intend to trunk across those links, use the switchport mode access interface configuration command to disable trunking. ■To enable trunking to a device that does not support DTP, use the switchport mode trunk and switchport nonegotiate interface configuration commands to cause the interface to become a trunk but to not generate DTP frames.
The IEEE 802.1Q trunks impose these restrictions on the trunking strategy for a network: ■In a network of Cisco switches connected through IEEE 802.1Q trunks, the switches maintain one spanning-tree instance for each VLAN allowed on the trunks. Non-Cisco devices might support one spanning-tree instance for all VLANs. When you connect a Cisco switch to a non-Cisco device through an IEEE 802.1Q trunk, the Cisco switch combines the spanning-tree instance of the VLAN of the trunk with the spanning-tree instance of the non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switch. However, spanning-tree information for each VLAN is maintained by Cisco switches separated by a cloud of non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q switches. The non-Cisco IEEE 802.1Q cloud separating the Cisco switches is treated as a single trunk link between the switches. ■Make sure the native VLAN for an IEEE 802.1Q trunk is the same on both ends of the trunk link. If the native VLAN on one end of the trunk is different from the native VLAN on the other end, spanning-tree loops might result. ■Disabling spanning tree on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk without disabling spanning tree on every VLAN in the network can potentially cause spanning-tree loops. We recommend that you leave spanning tree enabled on the native VLAN of an IEEE 802.1Q trunk or disable spanning tree on every VLAN in the network. Make sure your network is loop-free before you disable spanning tree.
Because trunk ports send and receive VTP advertisements, to use VTP you must ensure that at least one trunk port is configured on the switch and that this trunk port is connected to the trunk port of a second switch. Otherwise, the switch cannot receive any VTP advertisements. Note: By default, an interface is in Layer 2 mode. The default mode for Layer 2 interfaces is switchport mode dynamic auto. If the neighboring interface supports trunking and is configured to allow trunking, the link is a Layer 2 trunk or, if the interface is in Layer 3 mode, it becomes a Layer 2 trunk when you enter the switchport interface configuration command. Trunking interacts with other features in these ways: ■A trunk port cannot be a secure port. ■A trunk port cannot be a tunnel port. ■Trunk ports can be grouped into EtherChannel port groups, but all trunks in the group must have the same configuration. When a group is first created, all ports follow the parameters set for the first port to be added to the group. If you change the configuration of one of these parameters, the switch propagates the setting you entered to all ports in the group: –Allowed-VLAN list. –STP port priority for each VLAN. –STP Port Fast setting. –Trunk status. If one port in a port group ceases to be a trunk, all ports cease to be trunks. ■We recommend that you configure no more than 24 trunk ports in PVST mode and no more than 40 trunk ports in MST mode. ■If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a trunk port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is not changed. ■A port in dynamic mode can negotiate with its neighbor to become a trunk port. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic, the port mode is not changed. By default, a trunk port sends traffic to and receives traffic from all VLANs. All VLAN IDs, 1 to 4096, are allowed on each trunk. However, you can remove VLANs from the allowed list, preventing traffic from those VLANs from passing over the trunk. To restrict the traffic a trunk carries, use the switchport trunk allowed vlan remove vlan-list interface configuration command to remove specific VLANs from the allowed list. Note: VLAN 1 is the default VLAN on all trunk ports in all Cisco switches, and it has previously been a requirement that VLAN 1 always be enabled on every trunk link. You can use the VLAN 1 minimization feature to disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk link so that no user traffic (including spanning-tree advertisements) is sent or received on VLAN 1. To reduce the risk of spanning-tree loops or storms, you can disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk port by removing VLAN 1 from the allowed list. When you remove VLAN 1 from a trunk port, the interface continues to send and receive management traffic, for example, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), DTP, and VTP in VLAN 1. If a trunk port with VLAN 1 disabled is converted to a nontrunk port, it is added to the access VLAN. If the access VLAN is set to 1, the port will be added to VLAN 1, regardless of the switchport trunk allowed setting. The same situation applies for any VLAN that has been disabled on the port. A trunk port can become a member of a VLAN if the VLAN is enabled, if VTP knows of the VLAN, and if the VLAN is in the allowed list for the port. When VTP detects a newly enabled VLAN and the VLAN is in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port automatically becomes a member of the enabled VLAN. When VTP detects a new VLAN and the VLAN is not in the allowed list for a trunk port, the trunk port does not become a member of the new VLAN. A trunk port configured with IEEE 802.1Q tagging can receive both tagged and untagged traffic. By default, the switch forwards untagged traffic in the native VLAN configured for the port. The native VLAN is VLAN 1 by default. Note: The native VLAN can be assigned any VLAN ID. For information about IEEE 802.1Q configuration issues, see IEEE 802.1Q Configuration Guidelines. Load sharing divides the bandwidth supplied by parallel trunks connecting switches. To avoid loops, STP normally blocks all but one parallel link between switches. Using load sharing, you divide the traffic between the links according to which VLAN the traffic belongs. You configure load sharing on trunk ports by using STP port priorities or STP path costs. For load sharing using STP port priorities, both load-sharing links must be connected to the same switch. For load sharing using STP path costs, each load-sharing link can be connected to the same switch or to two different switches. When two ports on the same switch form a loop, the switch uses the STP port priority to decide which port is enabled and which port is in a blocking state. You can set the priorities on a parallel trunk port so that the port carries all the traffic for a given VLAN. The trunk port with the higher priority (lower values) for a VLAN is forwarding traffic for that VLAN. The trunk port with the lower priority (higher values) for the same VLAN remains in a blocking state for that VLAN. One trunk port sends or receives all traffic for the VLAN. Figure 30 shows two trunks connecting supported switches. In this example, the switches are configured as follows: ■VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 1. ■VLANs 3 through 6 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 1. ■VLANs 3 through 6 are assigned a port priority of 16 on Trunk 2. ■VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default port priority of 128 on Trunk 2. In this way, Trunk 1 carries traffic for VLANs 8 through 10, and Trunk 2 carries traffic for VLANs 3 through 6. If the active trunk fails, the trunk with the lower priority takes over and carries the traffic for all of the VLANs. No duplication of traffic occurs over any trunk port. Figure 30 Load Sharing by Using STP Port Priorities You can configure parallel trunks to share VLAN traffic by setting different path costs on a trunk and associating the path costs with different sets of VLANs, blocking different ports for different VLANs. The VLANs keep the traffic separate and maintain redundancy in the event of a lost link. In Figure 31, Trunk ports 1 and 2 are configured as 100BASE-T ports. These VLAN path costs are assigned: ■VLANs 2 through 4 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 1. ■VLANs 8 through 10 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 1 of 19. ■VLANs 8 through 10 are assigned a path cost of 30 on Trunk port 2. ■VLANs 2 through 4 retain the default 100BASE-T path cost on Trunk port 2 of 19. Figure 31 Load-Sharing Trunks with Traffic Distributed by Path Cost See Configuring Load Sharing Using STP Path Cost. The VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) is used to support dynamic-access ports, which are not permanently assigned to a VLAN, but give VLAN assignments based on the MAC source addresses seen on the port. Each time an unknown MAC address is seen, the switch sends a VQP query to a remote VMPS; the query includes the newly seen MAC address and the port on which it was seen. The VMPS responds with a VLAN assignment for the port. The switch cannot be a VMPS server but can act as a client to the VMPS and communicate with it through VQP. Each time the client switch receives the MAC address of a new host, it sends a VQP query to the VMPS. When the VMPS receives this query, it searches its database for a MAC-address-to-VLAN mapping. The server response is based on this mapping and whether or not the server is in open or secure mode. In secure mode, the server shuts down the port when an illegal host is detected. In open mode, the server simply denies the host access to the port. If the port is currently unassigned (that is, it does not yet have a VLAN assignment), the VMPS provides one of these responses: ■If the host is allowed on the port, the VMPS sends the client a vlan-assignment response containing the assigned VLAN name and allowing access to the host. ■If the host is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in open mode, the VMPS sends an access-denied response. ■If the VLAN is not allowed on the port and the VMPS is in secure mode, the VMPS sends a port-shutdown response. If the port already has a VLAN assignment, the VMPS provides one of these responses: ■If the VLAN in the database matches the current VLAN on the port, the VMPS sends a success response, allowing access to the host. ■If the VLAN in the database does not match the current VLAN on the port and active hosts exist on the port, the VMPS sends an access-denied or a port-shutdown response, depending on the secure mode of the VMPS. If the switch receives an access-denied response from the VMPS, it continues to block traffic to and from the host MAC address. The switch continues to monitor the packets directed to the port and sends a query to the VMPS when it identifies a new host address. If the switch receives a port-shutdown response from the VMPS, it disables the port. The port must be manually reenabled by using Network Assistant, the CLI or SNMP. A dynamic-access port can belong to only one VLAN with an ID from 1 to 4096. When the link comes up, the switch does not forward traffic to or from this port until the VMPS provides the VLAN assignment. The VMPS receives the source MAC address from the first packet of a new host connected to the dynamic-access port and attempts to match the MAC address to a VLAN in the VMPS database. If there is a match, the VMPS sends the VLAN number for that port. If the client switch was not previously configured, it uses the domain name from the first VTP packet it receives on its trunk port from the VMPS. If the client switch was previously configured, it includes its domain name in the query packet to the VMPS to obtain its VLAN number. The VMPS verifies that the domain name in the packet matches its own domain name before accepting the request and responds to the client with the assigned VLAN number for the client. If there is no match, the VMPS either denies the request or shuts down the port (depending on the VMPS secure mode setting). Multiple hosts (MAC addresses) can be active on a dynamic-access port if they are all in the same VLAN; however, the VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port if more than 20 hosts are active on the port. If the link goes down on a dynamic-access port, the port returns to an isolated state and does not belong to a VLAN. Any hosts that come online through the port are checked again through the VQP with the VMPS before the port is assigned to a VLAN. Dynamic-access ports can be used for direct host connections, or they can connect to a network. A maximum of 20 MAC addresses are allowed per port on the switch. A dynamic-access port can belong to only one VLAN at a time, but the VLAN can change over time, depending on the MAC addresses seen.
These guidelines and restrictions apply to dynamic-access port VLAN membership: ■You should configure the VMPS before you configure ports as dynamic-access ports. ■When you configure a port as a dynamic-access port, the spanning-tree Port Fast feature is automatically enabled for that port. The Port Fast mode accelerates the process of bringing the port into the forwarding state. ■IEEE 802.1x ports cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports. If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic-access (VQP) port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error message appears, and the VLAN configuration is not changed. ■Trunk ports cannot be dynamic-access ports, but you can enter the switchport access vlan dynamic interface configuration command for a trunk port. In this case, the switch retains the setting and applies it if the port is later configured as an access port. You must turn off trunking on the port before the dynamic-access setting takes effect. ■Dynamic-access ports cannot be monitor ports. ■Secure ports cannot be dynamic-access ports. You must disable port security on a port before it becomes dynamic. ■Private VLAN ports cannot be dynamic-access ports. ■Dynamic-access ports cannot be members of an EtherChannel group. ■Port channels cannot be configured as dynamic-access ports. ■A dynamic-access port can participate in fallback bridging. ■The VTP management domain of the VMPS client and the VMPS server must be the same. ■The VLAN configured on the VMPS server should not be a voice VLAN. VMPS clients periodically reconfirm the VLAN membership information received from the VMPS.You can set the number of minutes after which reconfirmation occurs. If you are configuring a member switch in a cluster, this parameter must be equal to or greater than the reconfirmation setting on the command switch. You must also first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the member switch. The VMPS shuts down a dynamic-access port under these conditions: ■The VMPS is in secure mode, and it does not allow the host to connect to the port. The VMPS shuts down the port to prevent the host from connecting to the network. ■More than 20 active hosts reside on a dynamic-access port. To reenable a disabled dynamic-access port, enter the shutdown interface configuration command followed by the no shutdown interface configuration command.
You configure dynamic VLANs by using the VMPS (VLAN Membership Policy Server). The switch can be a VMPS client; it cannot be a VMPS server. Before You Begin ■You must first enter the IP address of the server to configure the switch as a client. ■You must have IP connectivity to the VMPS for dynamic-access ports to work. You can test for IP connectivity by pinging the IP address of the VMPS and verifying that you get a response. ■If the VMPS is being defined for a cluster of switches, enter the address on the command switch.
Before You Begin If you are configuring a port on a cluster member switch as a dynamic-access port, first use the rcommand privileged EXEC command to log in to the cluster member switch. Caution: Dynamic-access port VLAN membership is for end stations or hubs connected to end stations. Connecting dynamic-access ports to other switches can cause a loss of connectivity.
Figure 32 shows a network with a VMPS server switch and VMPS client switches with dynamic-access ports. In this example, these assumptions apply: ■The VMPS server and the VMPS client are separate switches. ■The Catalyst 6500 series Switch A is the primary VMPS server. ■The Catalyst 6500 series Switch C and Switch J are secondary VMPS servers. ■End stations are connected to the clients, Switch B and Switch I. ■The database configuration file is stored on the TFTP server with the IP address 172.20.22.7. Figure 32 Dynamic Port VLAN Membership Configuration This example shows how to create Ethernet VLAN 20, name it test20, and add it to the VLAN database: This example shows how to configure a port as an access port in VLAN 2: This example shows how to create a new extended-range VLAN with all default characteristics: This example shows how to configure a port as an IEEE 802.1Q trunk. The example assumes that the neighbor interface is configured to support IEEE 802.1Q trunking. This example shows how to remove VLAN 2 from the allowed VLAN list on a port: This is an example of output for the show vmps privileged EXEC command: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 14
■You must configure SNMP on the switch to access RMON MIB objects. ■We recommend that you use a generic RMON console application on the network management station (NMS) to take advantage of the RMON network management capabilities. ■64-bit counters are not supported for RMON alarms. RMON is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) standard monitoring specification that allows various network agents and console systems to exchange network monitoring data. You can use the RMON feature with the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent in the switch to monitor all the traffic flowing among switches on all connected LAN segments as shown in Figure 72. Figure 72 Remote Monitoring Example The switch supports these RMON groups (defined in RFC 1757): ■Statistics (RMON group 1)—Collects Ethernet statistics on an interface. ■History (RMON group 2)—Collects a history group of statistics on Ethernet ports for a specified polling interval. ■Alarm (RMON group 3)—Monitors a specific management information base (MIB) object for a specified interval, triggers an alarm at a specified value (rising threshold), and resets the alarm at another value (falling threshold). Alarms can be used with events; the alarm triggers an event, which can generate a log entry or an SNMP trap. ■Event (RMON group 9)—Specifies the action to take when an event is triggered by an alarm. The action can be to generate a log entry or an SNMP trap. Because switches supported by this software release use hardware counters for RMON data processing, the monitoring is more efficient, and little processing power is required. Note: 64-bit counters are not supported for RMON alarms. RMON is disabled by default; no alarms or events are configured. You can configure your switch for RMON by using the command-line interface (CLI) or an SNMP-compatible network management station.
You must first configure RMON alarms and events to display collection information.
The following example shows how to configure an RMON alarm number: The alarm monitors the MIB variable ifEntry.20.1 once every 20 seconds until the alarm is disabled and checks the change in the variable’s rise or fall. If the ifEntry.20.1 value shows a MIB counter increase of 15 or more, such as from 100000 to 100015, the alarm is triggered. The alarm in turn triggers event number 1, which is configured with the rmon event command. Possible events can include a log entry or an SNMP trap. If the ifEntry.20.1 value changes by 0, the alarm is reset and can be triggered again. The following example creates RMON event number 1: The event is defined as High ifOutErrors and generates a log entry when the event is triggered by the alarm. The user jjones owns the row that is created in the event table by this command. This example also generates an SNMP trap when the event is triggered. This example shows how to collect RMON statistics for the owner root : The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 15Software Licensing is now simplified with the introduction of right-to-use (RTU) licensing. This allows you to order and activate a specific license type and level via command line. Uploading an extra license file is no longer necessary. Note: Upgrading to the IP Services feature set requires the purchase of one of the following licenses (product IDs listed): The introduction of right-to-use (RTU) licensing allows you to order and activate a specific license type and level via command line. Uploading an extra license file is no longer necessary. LanBase images provide basic Layer2 functionality, including: ■QOS ■Port-Security ■1588 PTP ■EtherNet/IP ■Profinet IPService: L3 routing features: ■RIP ■OSPF ■ISIS BGP ■Policy-based routing ■IPV6 The default license is a lanbase RTU permanent license. To configure RTU Licenses, follow these guidelines. To determine which license is running on your device, do the following: ■Enter the show version privileged EXEC command. The first line of output indicates the image, such as LANBASE. ■Enter the show license privileged EXEC command, to see which is the active image: To activate a Permanent Right-To-Use ipservices license, use the following command: IE5000#license right-to-use activate ipservices PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS CAREFULLY. INSTALLING THE LICENSE OR LICENSE KEY PROVIDED FOR ANY CISCO PRODUCT FEATURE OR USING SUCH PRODUCT FEATURE CONSTITUTES YOUR FULL ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS. YOU MUST NOT PROCEED FURTHER IF YOU ARE NOT WILLING TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS SET FORTH HEREIN. Use of this product feature requires an additional license from Cisco, together with an additional payment. You may use this product feature subject to the Cisco end user license agreement http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/warranty/English/EU1KEN_.html, together with any supplements relating to such product feature. It is your responsibility to make payment to Cisco for your use of the product feature if not already licensed to do so. Your acceptance of this agreement for the software features on one product shall be deemed your acceptance with respect to all such software on all Cisco products you purchase which includes the same software. (The foregoing notwithstanding, you must purchase a license for each software feature you use, so that if you enable a software feature on 1000 devices, you must purchase 1000 licenses for use.) This license may be transferrable from another Cisco device of the same model for the same functionality if such license already is owned. Activation of the software command line interface will be evidence of your acceptance of this agreement. ACCEPT? (yes/[no]): yes Activated Permanent Right-To-Use ipservices license Next Reboot level is ipservices IE5000# ■Express Setup for quickly configuring a switch for the first time with basic IP information, contact information, switch and Telnet passwords, and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) information through a browser-based program. ■User-defined and Cisco-default Smartports macros for creating custom switch configurations for simplified deployment across the network. ■A removable SD flash card that stores the Cisco IOS software image and configuration files for the switch. You can replace and upgrade the switch without reconfiguring the software features. ■An embedded Device Manager GUI for configuring and monitoring a single switch through a web browser. For more information about Device Manager, see the switch online help. ■Autosensing of port speed and autonegotiation of duplex mode on all switch ports for optimizing bandwidth ■Automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) capability on 10/100 and 10/100/1000 Mb/s interfaces and on 10/100/1000 BASE-TX SFP module interfaces that enables the interface to automatically detect the required cable connection type (straight-through or crossover) and to configure the connection appropriately ■Support for up to 1546 bytes routed frames, up to 9000 bytes for frames that are bridged in hardware, and up to 2000 bytes for frames that are bridged by software ■IEEE 802.3x flow control on all ports (the switch does not send pause frames) ■Support for up to 10 EtherChannel groups ■Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) and Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for automatic creation of EtherChannel links ■Per-port storm control for preventing broadcast, multicast, and unicast storms ■Port blocking on forwarding unknown Layer 2 unknown unicast, multicast, and bridged broadcast traffic ■Cisco Group Management Protocol (CGMP) server support and Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping for IGMP Versions 1, 2, and 3: –(For CGMP devices) CGMP for limiting multicast traffic to specified end stations and reducing overall network traffic –(For IGMP devices) IGMP snooping for forwarding multimedia and multicast traffic ■IGMP report suppression for sending only one IGMP report per multicast router query to the multicast devices (supported only for IGMPv1 or IGMPv2 queries) ■IGMP snooping querier support to configure switch to generate periodic IGMP general query messages ■IGMP helper to allow the switch to forward a host request to join a multicast stream to a specific IP destination address ■IGMP filtering for controlling the set of multicast groups to which hosts on a switch port can belong ■IGMP throttling for configuring the action when the maximum number of entries is in the IGMP forwarding table ■IGMP leave timer for configuring the leave latency for the network ■Switch Database Management (SDM) templates for allocating system resources to maximize support for user-selected features such as lanbase-routing, ipv6 routing. ■Cisco IOS IP Service Level Agreements (SLAs), a part of Cisco IOS software that uses active traffic monitoring for measuring network performance ■Configurable small-frame arrival threshold to prevent storm control when small frames (64 bytes or less) arrive on an interface at a specified rate (the threshold) ■FlexLink Multicast Fast Convergence to reduce the multicast traffic convergence time after a FlexLink failure ■RADIUS server load balancing to allow access and authentication requests to be distributed evenly across a server group ■Support for QoS marking of CPU-generated traffic and queue CPU-generated traffic on the egress network ports ■An embedded Device Manager—Device Manager is a GUI application that is integrated in the software image. You use it to configure and to monitor a single switch. For more information about Device Manager, see the switch online help. ■Network Assistant—Network Assistant is a network management application that can be downloaded from Cisco.com. You use it to manage a single switch, a cluster of switches, or a community of devices. For more information about Network Assistant, see Getting Started with Cisco Network Assistant, available at software.cisco.com/download/. ■Prime Infrastructure—Cisco Prime Infrastructure simplifies the management of wireless and wired networks. It offers Day 0 and 1 provisioning, as well as Day N assurance from the branch to the data center. We call it One Management. With this single view and point of control, you can reap the benefits of One Management across both network and compute. ■CLI—The Cisco IOS software supports desktop- and multilayer-switching features. You can access the CLI either by connecting your management station directly to the switch console port or by using Telnet from a remote management station. ■SNMP—SNMP management applications such as CiscoWorks2000 LAN Management Suite (LMS) and HP OpenView. You can manage from an SNMP-compatible management station that is running platforms such as HP OpenView or SunNet Manager. The switch supports a comprehensive set of MIB extensions and four remote monitoring (RMON) groups. For more information about using SNMP, see Configuring SNMP ■Cisco IOS Configuration Engine (previously known as the Cisco IOS CNS agent)—Configuration service automates the deployment and management of network devices and services. You can automate initial configurations and configuration updates by generating switch-specific configuration changes, sending them to the switch, executing the configuration change, and logging the results. For more information about CNS, see Configuring Cisco IOS Configuration Engine ■CIP—Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) is a peer-to-peer application protocol that provides application level connections between the switch and industrial devices such as I/O controllers, sensors, relays, and so forth.You can manage the switch using RSlogix/RSlinx then monitor the CIP functionality via IOS command lines or Web based Device Manager. ■Profinet Version 2—Support for PROFINET IO, a modular communication framework for distributed automation applications. The embedded Profinet GSD file allows user to bring up Cisco IE switch using Siemens STEP7 or TIA Portal software then monitor the functionality via command line or Web based Device Manger. Page 16
This chapter describes how to identify and resolve software problems related to the Cisco IOS software on the switch. Depending on the nature of the problem, you can use the command-line interface (CLI), Network Assistant or Device Manager to identify and solve problems. For additional troubleshooting information, such as LED descriptions, see the Hardware Installation Guide. The IEEE 802.3ab autonegotiation protocol manages the switch settings for speed (10 Mb/s, 100 Mb/s, and 1000 Mb/s, excluding SFP module ports) and duplex (half or full). There are situations when this protocol can incorrectly align these settings, reducing performance. A mismatch occurs under these circumstances: ■A manually set speed or duplex parameter is different from the manually set speed or duplex parameter on the connected port. ■A port is set to autonegotiate, and the connected port is set to full duplex with no autonegotiation. To maximize switch performance and ensure a link, follow one of these guidelines when changing the settings for duplex and speed: ■Let both ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex. ■Manually set the speed and duplex parameters for the ports on both ends of the connection. Note: If a remote device does not autonegotiate, configure the duplex settings on the two ports to match. The speed parameter can adjust itself even if the connected port does not autonegotiate. Cisco small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules have a serial EEPROM that contains the module serial number, the vendor name and ID, a unique security code, and cyclic redundancy check (CRC). When an SFP module is inserted in the switch, the switch software reads the EEPROM to verify the serial number, vendor name and vendor ID, and recompute the security code and CRC. If the serial number, the vendor name or vendor ID, the security code, or CRC is invalid, the software generates a security error message and places the interface in an error-disabled state. Note: The security error message references the GBIC_SECURITY facility. The switch supports SFP modules and does not support GBIC modules. Although the error message text refers to GBIC interfaces and modules, the security messages actually refer to the SFP modules and module interfaces. If you are using a non-Cisco SFP module, remove the SFP module from the switch, and replace it with a Cisco module. After inserting a Cisco SFP module, use the errdisable recovery cause gbic-invalid global configuration command to verify the port status, and enter a time interval for recovering from the error-disabled state. After the elapsed interval, the switch brings the interface out of the error-disabled state and retries the operation. If the module is identified as a Cisco SFP module, but the system is unable to read vendor-data information to verify its accuracy, an SFP module error message is generated. In this case, you should remove and reinsert the SFP module. If it continues to fail, the SFP module might be defective. The switch supports IP ping, which you can use to test connectivity to remote hosts. Ping sends an echo request packet to an address and waits for a reply. Ping returns one of these responses: ■Normal response—The normal response ( hostname is alive) occurs in 1 to 10 seconds, depending on network traffic. ■Destination does not respond—If the host does not respond, a no-answer message is returned. ■Unknown host—If the host does not exist, an unknown host message is returned. ■Destination unreachable—If the default gateway cannot reach the specified network, a destination-unreachable message is returned. ■Network or host unreachable—If there is no entry in the route table for the host or network, a network or host unreachable message is returned. The Layer 2 traceroute feature allows the switch to identify the physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a destination device. Layer 2 traceroute supports only unicast source and destination MAC addresses. It finds the path by using the MAC address tables of the switches in the path. When the switch detects a device in the path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out. The switch can only identify the path from the source device to the destination device. It cannot identify the path that a packet takes from source host to the source device or from the destination device to the destination host. ■Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the devices in the network. For Layer 2 traceroute to function properly, do not disable CDP. If any devices in the physical path are transparent to CDP, the switch cannot identify the path through these devices. For more information about enabling CDP, see Configuring CDP ■A switch is reachable from another switch when you can test connectivity by using the ping privileged EXEC command. All switches in the physical path must be reachable from each other. ■The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten. ■You can enter the traceroute mac or the traceroute mac ip privileged EXEC command on a switch that is not in the physical path from the source device to the destination device. All switches in the path must be reachable from this switch. ■The traceroute mac command output shows the Layer 2 path only when the specified source and destination MAC addresses belong to the same VLAN. If you specify source and destination MAC addresses that belong to different VLANs, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears. ■If you specify a multicast source or destination MAC address, the path is not identified, and an error message appears. ■If the source or destination MAC address belongs to multiple VLANs, you must specify the VLAN to which both the source and destination MAC addresses belong. If the VLAN is not specified, the path is not identified, and an error message appears. ■The traceroute mac ip command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination IP addresses belong to the same subnet. When you specify the IP addresses, the switch uses the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate the IP addresses with the corresponding MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs. –If an ARP entry exists for the specified IP address, the switch uses the associated MAC address and identifies the physical path. –If an ARP entry does not exist, the switch sends an ARP query and tries to resolve the IP address. If the IP address is not resolved, the path is not identified, and an error message appears. ■When multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port), the Layer 2 traceroute feature is not supported. When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears. You can use IP traceroute to identify the path that packets take through the network on a hop-by-hop basis. The command output displays all network layer (Layer 3) devices, such as routers, that the traffic passes through on the way to the destination. Your switches can participate as the source or destination of the traceroute privileged EXEC command and might or might not appear as a hop in the traceroute command output. If the switch is the destination of the traceroute, it is displayed as the final destination in the traceroute output. Intermediate switches do not show up in the traceroute output if they are only bridging the packet from one port to another within the same VLAN. However, if the intermediate switch is a multilayer switch that is routing a particular packet, this switch shows up as a hop in the traceroute output. The traceroute privileged EXEC command uses the Time To Live (TTL) field in the IP header to cause routers and servers to generate specific return messages. Traceroute starts by sending a User Datagram Protocol (UDP) datagram to the destination host with the TTL field set to 1. If a router finds a TTL value of 1 or 0, it drops the datagram and sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) time-to-live-exceeded message to the sender. Traceroute finds the address of the first hop by examining the source address field of the ICMP time-to-live-exceeded message. To identify the next hop, traceroute sends a UDP packet with a TTL value of 2. The first router decrements the TTL field by 1 and sends the datagram to the next router. The second router sees a TTL value of 1, discards the datagram, and returns the time-to-live-exceeded message to the source. This process continues until the TTL is incremented to a value large enough for the datagram to reach the destination host (or until the maximum TTL is reached). To learn when a datagram reaches its destination, traceroute sets the UDP destination port number in the datagram to a very large value that the destination host is unlikely to be using. When a host receives a datagram destined to itself containing a destination port number that is unused locally, it sends an ICMP port-unreachable error to the source. Because all errors except port-unreachable errors come from intermediate hops, the receipt of a port-unreachable error means that this message was sent by the destination port. You can use the Time Domain Reflector (TDR) feature to diagnose and resolve cabling problems. When running TDR, a local device sends a signal through a cable and compares the reflected signal to the initial signal. TDR is supported only on 10/100 and 10/100/1000 copper Ethernet ports. It is not supported on SFP module ports. TDR can detect these cabling problems: ■Open, broken, or cut twisted-pair wires—The wires are not connected to the wires from the remote device. ■Shorted twisted-pair wires—The wires are touching each other or the wires from the remote device. For example, a shorted twisted pair can occur if one wire of the twisted pair is soldered to the other wire. If one of the twisted-pair wires is open, TDR can find the length at which the wire is open. Use TDR to diagnose and resolve cabling problems in these situations: ■Replacing a switch ■Setting up a wiring closet ■Troubleshooting a connection between two devices when a link cannot be established or when it is not operating properly The crashinfo files save information that helps Cisco technical support representatives to debug problems that caused the Cisco IOS image to fail (crash). The switch writes the crash information to the console at the time of the failure. The switch creates two types of crashinfo files: ■Basic crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file the next time you boot up the Cisco IOS image after the failure. ■Extended crashinfo file—The switch automatically creates this file when the system is failing. The information in the basic file includes the Cisco IOS image name and version that failed, a list of the processor registers, and other switch-specific information. You can provide this information to the Cisco technical support representative by using the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. Basic crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system: flash:/crashinfo/. The filenames are crashinfo_ n where n is a sequence number. Each new crashinfo file that is created uses a sequence number that is larger than any previously existing sequence number, so the file with the largest sequence number describes the most recent failure. Version numbers are used instead of a timestamp because the switches do not include a real-time clock. You cannot change the name of the file that the system will use when it creates the file. However, after the file is created, you can use the rename privileged EXEC command to rename it, but the contents of the renamed file will not be displayed by the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You can delete crashinfo files by using the delete privileged EXEC command. You can display the most recent basic crashinfo file (that is, the file with the highest sequence number at the end of its filename) by entering the show tech-support privileged EXEC command. You also can access the file by using any command that can copy or display files, such as the more or the copy privileged EXEC command. The switch creates the extended crashinfo file when the system is failing. The information in the extended file includes additional information that can help determine the cause of the switch failure. You provide this information to the Cisco technical support representative by manually accessing the file and using the more or the copy privileged EXEC command. Extended crashinfo files are kept in this directory on the flash file system: flash:/crashinfo_ext/. The filenames are crashinfo_ext_ n where n is a sequence number. You can configure the switch to not create the extended creashinfo file by using the no exception crashinfo global configuration command. This section lists some possible symptoms that could be caused by the CPU being too busy and shows how to verify a CPU utilization problem. Table 71 lists the primary types of CPU utilization problems that you can identify. It gives possible causes and corrective action with links to the Troubleshooting High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com. Excessive CPU utilization might result in these symptoms, but the symptoms could also result from other causes. ■Spanning tree topology changes ■EtherChannel links brought down due to loss of communication ■Failure to respond to management requests (ICMP ping, SNMP timeouts, slow Telnet or SSH sessions) ■UDLD flapping ■IP SLAs failures because of SLAs responses beyond an acceptable threshold ■DHCP or IEEE 802.1x failures if the switch does not forward or respond to requests To determine if high CPU utilization is a problem, enter the show processes cpu sorted privileged EXEC command. Note the underlined information in the first line of the output example. This example shows normal CPU utilization. The output shows that utilization for the last 5 seconds is 8%/0%, which has this meaning: ■The total CPU utilization is 8 percent, including both time running Cisco IOS processes and time spent handling interrupts. ■The time spent handling interrupts is zero percent.
■For complete information about CPU utilization and how to troubleshoot utilization problems, see the Troubleshooting High CPU Utilization document on Cisco.com. Switch software can be corrupted during an upgrade, by downloading the wrong file to the switch, and by deleting the image file. In all of these cases, the switch does not pass the power-on self-test (POST), and there is no connectivity. This procedure uses the Xmodem Protocol to recover from a corrupt or wrong image file. There are many software packages that support the Xmodem Protocol, and this procedure is largely dependent on the emulation software that you are using. This recovery procedure requires that you have physical access to the switch. 1. From your PC, download the software image tar file ( image_filename.tar) from Cisco.com. The Cisco IOS image is stored as a bin file in a directory in the tar file. For information about locating the software image files on Cisco.com, see the release notes. 2. Extract the bin file from the tar file. ■If you are using Windows, use a zip program that can read a tar file. Use the zip program to navigate to and extract the bin file. ■If you are using UNIX, follow these steps: –Display the contents of the tar file by using the tar -tvf < image_filename.tar > UNIX command. –Locate the bin file, and extract it by using the tar -xvf < image_filename.tar > < image_filename.bin > UNIX command. –Verify that the bin file was extracted by using the ls -l < image_filename.bin > UNIX command. 3. Connect your PC with terminal-emulation software supporting the Xmodem Protocol to the switch console port. 4. Set the line speed on the emulation software to 9600 baud. 5. Unplug the switch power cord. 6. Press the Express Setup buttonfactory default button and at the same time, reconnect the power cord to the switch. You can release the button a second or two after the LED above port 1 goes offwhen the password-recovery mechanism is enabled. message appears. Several lines of information about the software appear along with instructions: 7. Initialize the flash file system: 8. If you had set the console port speed to anything other than 9600, it has been reset to that particular speed. Change the emulation software line speed to match that of the switch console port. 9. Load any helper files: 10. Start the file transfer by using the Xmodem Protocol. 11. After the Xmodem request appears, use the appropriate command on the terminal-emulation software to start the transfer and to copy the software image into flash memory. 12. Boot the newly downloaded Cisco IOS image. 13. Use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download the software image to the switch. 14. Use the reload privileged EXEC command to restart the switch and to verify that the new software image is operating properly. 15. Delete the flash: image_filename.bin file from the switch. If you lose or forget your password, you can delete the switch password and set a new one. Before you begin, make sure that: ■You have physical access to the switch. ■At least one switch port is enabled and is not connected to a device. To delete the switch password and set a new one, follow these steps: 1. Press the Express Setup button until the SETUP LED blinks green and the LED of an available switch downlink port blinks green. If no switch downlink port is available for your PC or laptop connection, disconnect a device from one of the switch downlink ports. Press the Express Setup button again until the SETUP LED and the port LED blink green. 2. Connect your PC or laptop to the port with the blinking green LED. The SETUP LED and the switch downlink port LED stop blinking and stay solid green. 3. Press and hold the Express Setup button. Notice that the SETUP LED starts blinking green again. Continue holding the button until the SETUP LED turns solid green (approximately 5 seconds). Release the Express Setup button immediately. This procedure deletes the password without affecting any other configuration settings. You can now access the switch without a password through the console port or by using Device Manager. 4. Enter a new password through the device manager by using the Express Setup window or through the command line interface by using the enable secret global configuration command. Some configurations can prevent the command switch from maintaining contact with member switches. If you are unable to maintain management contact with a member, and the member switch is forwarding packets normally, check for these conflicts: ■A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch) cannot connect to the command switch through a port that is defined as a network port. ■Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 member switches must connect to the command switch through a port that belongs to the same management VLAN. ■A member switch (Catalyst 3750, Catalyst 3560, Catalyst 3550, Catalyst 2970, Catalyst 2960, Catalyst 2950, Catalyst 3500 XL, Catalyst 2900 XL, Catalyst 2820, and Catalyst 1900 switch) connected to the command switch through a secured port can lose connectivity if the port is disabled because of a security violation. If you attempt to ping a host in a different IP subnetwork, you must define a static route to the network or have IP routing configured to route between those subnets. IP routing is disabled by default on all switches. If you need to enable or configure IP routing, see Configuring Static IP Unicast Routing Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, use this command to ping another device on the network from the switch:
Note: Other protocol keywords are available with the ping command, but they are not supported in this release. This example shows how to ping an IP host: Table 72 describes the possible ping character output.
To end a ping session, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and release the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter the following command to trace that the path packets take through the network:
Note: Other protocol keywords are available with the traceroute privileged EXEC command, but they are not supported in this release. This example shows how to perform a traceroute to an IP host: The display shows the hop count, the IP address of the router, and the round-trip time in milliseconds for each of the three probes that are sent. Table 73 lists the characters that can appear in the traceroute command output.
To end a trace in progress, enter the escape sequence (Ctrl-^ X by default). Simultaneously press and release the Ctrl, Shift, and 6 keys and then press the X key. To run TDR, enter the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command: To display the results, enter the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command. Caution: Because debugging output is assigned high priority in the CPU process, it can render the system unusable. For this reason, use debug commands only to troubleshoot specific problems or during troubleshooting sessions with Cisco technical support staff. It is best to use debug commands during periods of lower network traffic and fewer users. Debugging during these periods decreases the likelihood that increased debug command processing overhead will affect system use. All debug commands are entered in privileged EXEC mode, and most debug commands take no arguments. For example, beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable the debugging for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN): The switch continues to generate output until you enter the no form of the command. If you enable a debug command and no output appears, consider these possibilities: ■The switch might not be properly configured to generate the type of traffic you want to monitor. Use the show running-config command to check its configuration. ■Even if the switch is properly configured, it might not generate the type of traffic you want to monitor during the particular period that debugging is enabled. Depending on the feature you are debugging, you can use commands such as the TCP/IP ping command to generate network traffic. To disable debugging of SPAN, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode: Alternately, in privileged EXEC mode, you can enter the undebug form of the command: To display the state of each debugging option, enter this command in privileged EXEC mode: Beginning in privileged EXEC mode, enter this command to enable all-system diagnostics: Caution: Because debugging output takes priority over other network traffic, and because the debug all privileged EXEC command generates more output than any other debug command, it can severely diminish switch performance or even render it unusable. In virtually all cases, it is best to use more specific debug commands. The no debug all privileged EXEC command disables all diagnostic output. Using the no debug all command is a convenient way to ensure that you have not accidentally left any debug commands enabled. By default, the network server sends the output from debug commands and system error messages to the console. If you use this default, you can use a virtual terminal connection to monitor debug output instead of connecting to the console port. Possible destinations include the console, virtual terminals, internal buffer, and UNIX hosts running a syslog server. The syslog format is compatible with 4.3 Berkeley Standard Distribution (BSD) UNIX and its derivatives. Note: Be aware that the debugging destination you use affects system overhead. Logging messages to the console produces very high overhead, whereas logging messages to a virtual terminal produces less overhead. Logging messages to a syslog server produces even less, and logging to an internal buffer produces the least overhead of any method. For more information about system message logging, see Configuring System Message Logging You can display the physical path that a packet takes from a source device to a destination device by using one of these privileged EXEC commands: ■ tracetroute mac [ interface interface-id ] { source-mac-address } [ interface interface-id ] { destination-mac-address } [ vlan vlan-id ] [ detail ] ■ tracetroute mac ip { source-ip-address | source-hostname }{ destination-ip-address | destination-hostname } [ detail ] You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module by using the show interfaces transceiver privileged EXEC command. This command shows the operational status, such as the temperature and the current for an SFP module on a specific interface and the alarm status. You can also use the command to check the speed and the duplex settings on an SFP module. The output from the show platform forward privileged EXEC command provides some useful information about the forwarding results if a packet entering an interface is sent through the system. Depending upon the parameters entered about the packet, the output provides lookup table results and port maps used to calculate forwarding destinations, bitmaps, and egress information. Most of the information in the output from the command is useful mainly for technical support personnel, who have access to detailed information about the switch application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs). However, packet forwarding information can also be helpful in troubleshooting. This is an example of the output from the show platform forward command on port 1 in VLAN 5 when the packet entering that port is addressed to unknown MAC addresses. The packet should be flooded to all other ports in VLAN 5. This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 is sent to an address already learned on the VLAN on another port. It should be forwarded from the port on which the address was learned. This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address unknown. Because there is no default route set, the packet should be dropped. This is an example of the output when the packet coming in on port 1 in VLAN 5 has a destination MAC address set to the router MAC address in VLAN 5 and the destination IP address set to an IP address that is in the IP routing table. It should be forwarded as specified in the routing table. The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 17
■Understanding MODBUS TCP ■Configuring the Switch as the MODBUS TCP Server ■Displaying MODBUS TCP Information Use Modicon Communication Bus (MODBUS) TCP over an Ethernet network when connecting the switch to devices such as intelligent electronic devices (IEDs), distributed controllers, substation routers, Cisco IP Phones, Cisco Wireless Access Points, and other network devices such as redundant substation switches. MODBUS is a serial communications protocol for client-server communication between a switch (server) and a device in the network running MODBUS client software (client). You can use MODBUS to connect a computer to a remote terminal unit (RTU) in supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) systems. The client can be an IED or a human machine interface (HMI) application that remotely configure and manage devices running MODBUS TCP. The switch functions as the server. The switch encapsulates a request or response message in a MODBUS TCP application data unit (ADU). A client sends a message to a TCP port on the switch. The default port number is 502. ■MODBUS and Security ■Multiple Request Messages If a firewall or other security services are enabled, the switch TCP port might be blocked, and the switch and the client cannot communicate. If a firewall and other security services are disabled, a denial-of-service attack might occur on the switch. ■To prevent a denial-of-service attack and to allow a specific client to send messages to the switch (server), you can use this standard access control list (ACL) that permits traffic only from the source IP address 10.1.1.n : ■To configure quality of service (QoS) to set the rate-limit for MODBUS TCP traffic: The switch can receive multiple request messages from clients and respond to them simultaneously. You can set the number of client connections from 1 to 5. The default is 1. ■Defaults ■Enabling MODBUS TCP on the Switch The switch is not configured as a MODBUS TCP server. The TCP switch port number is 502. The number of simultaneous connection requests is 1. Beginning in privileged EXEC mode:
To disable MODBUS on the switch and return to the default settings, enter the no scada modbus tcp server global configuration command. To clear the server and client statistics, enter the clear scada modbus tcp server statistics privileged EXEC command. After you enable MODBUS TCP on the switch, this warning appears: WARNING: Starting Modbus TCP server is a security risk. Please understand the security issues involved before proceeding further. Do you still want to start the server? [yes/no]: To add security when using MODBUS TCP, configure an ACL to permit traffic from specific clients or configure QoS to rate-limit traffic.
Page 18
■By default, the IP device tracking feature is disabled on a switch. You must enable the IP device tracking feature to use web-based authentication. ■You must configure at least one IP address to run the switch HTTP server. You must also configure routes to reach each host IP address. The HTTP server sends the HTTP login page to the host. ■You must configure the default ACL on the interface before configuring web-based authentication. Configure a port ACL for a Layer 2 interface. ■Web-based authentication is an ingress-only feature. ■You can configure web-based authentication only on access ports. Web-based authentication is not supported on trunk ports, EtherChannel member ports, or dynamic trunk ports. ■You cannot authenticate hosts on Layer 2 interfaces with static ARP cache assignment. These hosts are not detected by the web-based authentication feature because they do not send ARP messages. ■Hosts that are more than one hop away might experience traffic disruption if an STP topology change results in the host traffic arriving on a different port. This occurs because the ARP and DHCP updates might not be sent after a Layer 2 (STP) topology change. ■Web-based authentication does not support VLAN assignment as a downloadable-host policy. ■Web-based authentication is not supported for IPv6 traffic. ■Web-based authentication and Network Edge Access Topology (NEAT) are mutually exclusive. You cannot use web-based authentication when NEAT is enabled on an interface, and you cannot use NEAT when web-based authentication is running on an interface. ■Web-based authentication supports only RADIUS authorization servers. You cannot use TACACS+ servers or local authorization. Use the web-based authentication feature, known as web authentication proxy, to authenticate end users on host systems that do not run the IEEE 802.1x supplicant. Note: You can configure web-based authentication on Layer 2 interfaces. When you initiate an HTTP session, web-based authentication intercepts ingress HTTP packets from the host and sends an HTML login page to the users. The users enter their credentials, which the web-based authentication feature sends to the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server for authentication. If authentication succeeds, web-based authentication sends a Login-Successful HTML page to the host and applies the access policies returned by the AAA server. If authentication fails, web-based authentication forwards a Login-Fail HTML page to the user, prompting the user to retry the login. If the user exceeds the maximum number of attempts, web-based authentication forwards a Login-Expired HTML page to the host, and the user is placed on a watch list for a waiting period. These sections describe the role of web-based authentication as part of AAA: ■Device Roles ■Host Detection ■Session Creation ■Authentication Process ■Web Authentication Customizable Web Pages ■Web-Based Authentication Interactions with Other Features With web-based authentication, the devices in the network have these specific roles: ■Client—The device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and the services and responds to requests from the switch. The workstation must be running an HTML browser with Java Script enabled. ■Authentication server—Authenticates the client. The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch that the client is authorized to access the LAN and the switch services or that the client is denied. ■Switch—Controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client. The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client. Figure 24 Web-Based Authentication Device Roles The switch maintains an IP device tracking table to store information about detected hosts. Note: By default, the IP device tracking feature is disabled on a switch. You must enable the IP device tracking feature to use web-based authentication. For Layer 2 interfaces, web-based authentication detects IP hosts by using these mechanisms: ■ARP-based trigger—ARP redirect ACL allows web-based authentication to detect hosts with a static IP address or a dynamic IP address. ■Dynamic ARP inspection ■DHCP snooping—Web-based authentication is notified when the switch creates a DHCP-binding entry for the host. When web-based authentication detects a new host, it creates a session as follows: ■Reviews the exception list. If the host IP is included in the exception list, the policy from the exception list entry is applied, and the session is established. ■Reviews for authorization bypass. If the host IP is not on the exception list, web-based authentication sends a nonresponsive-host (NRH) request to the server. If the server response is access accepted, authorization is bypassed for this host. The session is established. ■Sets up the HTTP intercept ACL. If the server response to the NRH request is access rejected, the HTTP intercept ACL is activated, and the session waits for HTTP traffic from the host. When you enable web-based authentication, these events occur: ■The user initiates an HTTP session. ■The HTTP traffic is intercepted, and authorization is initiated. The switch sends the login page to the user. The user enters a username and password, and the switch sends the entries to the authentication server. ■If the authentication succeeds, the switch downloads and activates the user’s access policy from the authentication server. The login success page is sent to the user. ■If the authentication fails, the switch sends the login fail page. The user retries the login. If the maximum number of attempts fails, the switch sends the login expired page, and the host is placed in a watch list. After the watch list times out, the user can retry the authentication process. ■If the authentication server does not respond to the switch, and if an AAA fail policy is configured, the switch applies the failure access policy to the host. The login success page is sent to the user. (See Local Web Authentication Banner.) ■The switch reauthenticates a client when the host does not respond to an ARP probe on a Layer 2 interface, or when the host does not send any traffic within the idle timeout on a Layer 3 interface. ■The feature applies the downloaded timeout or the locally configured session timeout. ■If the terminate action is RADIUS, the feature sends a nonresponsive host (NRH) request to the server. The terminate action is included in the response from the server. ■If the terminate action is default, the session is dismantled, and the applied policy is removed. You can create a banner that will appear when you log in to a switch by using web authentication. The banner appears on both the login page and the authentication-result pop-up pages: ■Authentication Successful ■Authentication Failed ■Authentication Expired You create a banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http global configuration command. The default banner Cisco Systems and Switch host-name Authentication appear on the Login Page. Cisco Systems appears on the authentication result pop-up page, as shown in Figure 25. Figure 25 Authentication Successful Banner You can also customize the banner, as shown in Figure 26. ■Add a switch, router, or company name to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http banner-text global configuration command. ■Add a logo or text file to the banner by using the ip admission auth-proxy-banner http file-path global configuration command. Figure 26 Customized Web Banner If you do not enable a banner, only the username and password dialog boxes appear in the web authentication login screen, and no banner appears when you log into the switch, as shown in Login Screen with No Banner. Figure 27 Login Screen with No Banner For more information, see the Cisco IOS Security Command Reference and Configuring a Web Authentication Local Banner. During the web-based authentication process, the switch internal HTTP server hosts four HTML pages to deliver to an authenticating client. The server uses these pages to notify you of these four-authentication process states: ■Login—Your credentials are requested. ■Success—The login was successful. ■Fail—The login failed. ■Expire—The login session has expired because of excessive login failures. ■You can substitute your own HTML pages for the default internal HTML pages. ■You can use a logo or specify text in the login, success, failure, and expire web pages. ■On the banner page, you can specify text in the login page. ■The pages are in HTML. ■You must include an HTML redirect command in the success page to access a specific URL. ■The URL string must be a valid URL (for example, http://www.cisco.com). An incomplete URL might cause page not found error or similar errors on a web browser. ■If you configure web pages for HTTP authentication, they must include the appropriate HTML commands (for example, to set the page time out, to set a hidden password, or to confirm that the same page is not submitted twice). ■The CLI command to redirect users to a specific URL is not available when the configured login form is enabled. The administrator should ensure that the redirection is configured in the web page. ■If the CLI command redirecting users to a specific URL after authentication occurs is entered and then the command configuring web pages is entered, the CLI command redirecting users to a specific URL does not take effect. ■Configured web pages can be copied to the switch boot flash or flash. ■Configured pages can be accessed from the flash on the stack master or members. ■The login page can be on one flash, and the success and failure pages can be another flash (for example, the flash on the stack master or a member). ■You must configure all four pages. ■The banner page has no effect if it is configured with the web page. ■All of the logo files (image, flash, audio, video, and so on) that are stored in the system directory (for example, flash, disk0, or disk) and that must be displayed on the login page must use web_auth_filename as the filename. ■The configured authentication proxy feature supports both HTTP and SSL. When configuring customized authentication proxy web pages, follow these guidelines: ■To enable the custom web pages feature, specify all four custom HTML files. If you specify fewer than four files, the internal default HTML pages are used. ■The four custom HTML files must be present on the flash memory of the switch. The maximum size of each HTML file is 8 KB. ■Any images on the custom pages must be on an accessible HTTP server. Configure an intercept ACL within the admission rule. ■Any external link from a custom page requires configuration of an intercept ACL within the admission rule. ■To access a valid DNS server, any name resolution required for external links or images requires configuration of an intercept ACL within the admission rule. ■If the custom web pages feature is enabled, a configured auth-proxy-banner is not used. ■If the custom web pages feature is enabled, the redirection URL for successful login feature is not available. ■To remove the specification of a custom file, use the no form of the command. Because the custom login page is a public web form, consider these guidelines for the page: ■The login form must accept user entries for the username and password and must show them as uname and pwd. ■The custom login page should follow best practices for a web form, such as page timeout, hidden password, and prevention of redundant submissions. You can substitute your HTML pages, as shown in Customizeable Authentication Page, for the default internal HTML pages. You can also specify a URL to which users are redirected after authentication occurs, which replaces the internal Success page. Figure 28 Customizeable Authentication Page ■Port Security ■LAN Port IP ■Gateway IP ■ACLs ■Context-Based Access Control ■802.1x Authentication ■EtherChannel You can configure web-based authentication and port security on the same port. Web-based authentication authenticates the port, and port security manages network access for all MAC addresses, including that of the client. You can then limit the number or group of clients that can access the network through the port. You can configure LAN port IP (LPIP) and Layer 2 web-based authentication on the same port. The host is authenticated by using web-based authentication first, followed by LPIP posture validation. The LPIP host policy overrides the web-based authentication host policy. If the web-based authentication idle timer expires, the NAC policy is removed. The host is authenticated, and posture is validated again. You cannot configure Gateway IP (GWIP) on a Layer 3 VLAN interface if web-based authentication is configured on any of the switch ports in the VLAN. You can configure web-based authentication on the same Layer 3 interface as Gateway IP. The host policies for both features are applied in software. The GWIP policy overrides the web-based authentication host policy. If you configure a VLAN ACL or a Cisco IOS ACL on an interface, the ACL is applied to the host traffic only after the web-based authentication host policy is applied. For Layer 2 web-based authentication, you must configure a port ACL (PACL) as the default access policy for ingress traffic from hosts connected to the port. After authentication, the web-based authentication host policy overrides the PACL. Note: When a proxy ACL is configured for a web-based authentication client, the proxy ACL is downloaded and applied as part of the authorization process. Hence, the PACL displays the proxy ACL access control entry (ACE). You cannot configure a MAC ACL and web-based authentication on the same interface. You cannot configure web-based authentication on a port whose access VLAN is configured for VACL capture. Web-based authentication cannot be configured on a Layer 2 port if context-based access control (CBAC) is configured on the Layer 3 VLAN interface of the port VLAN. You cannot configure web-based authentication on the same port as 802.1x authentication except as a fallback authentication method. You can configure web-based authentication on a Layer 2 EtherChannel interface. The web-based authentication configuration applies to all member channels.
RADIUS security servers identification: ■Host name ■Host IP address ■Host name and specific UDP port numbers ■IP address and specific UDP port numbers The combination of the IP address and UDP port number creates a unique identifier, that enables RADIUS requests to be sent to multiple UDP ports on a server at the same IP address. If two different host entries on the same RADIUS server are configured for the same service (for example, authentication) the second host entry that is configured functions as the failover backup to the first one. The RADIUS host entries are chosen in the order that they were configured.
Before You Begin You can configure web authentication to display four substitute HTML pages to the user in place of the switch default HTML pages during web-based authentication. To specify the use of your custom authentication proxy web pages, first store your custom HTML files on the switch flash memory, then perform this task in global configuration mode:
You can specify a URL to which the user is redirected after authentication, effectively replacing the internal Success HTML page.
You can configure the maximum number of failed login attempts before the client is placed in a watch list for a waiting period.
Enter a specific IP address to delete the entry for a single host. Use an asterisk to delete all cache entries.
This example shows how to verify the configuration: This example shows how to enable AAA: This example shows how to configure the RADIUS server parameters on a switch: This example shows how to configure custom authentication proxy web pages: This example shows how to verify the configuration of a custom authentication proxy web pages: This example shows how to configure a redirection URL for successful login: This example shows how to verify the redirection URL for successful login: This example shows how to configure a local banner with the custom message My Switch: This example shows how to remove the web-based authentication session for the client at the IP address 209.165.201.1: The following sections provide references related to switch administration:
Page 19
This chapter describes how to configure IP Version 4 (IPv4) unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as switch. Note: Dynamic routing protocols are only supported on switches running IP Services feature set. Static routing is supported on Lan Base feature set. For more detailed IPv4 unicast configuration information and complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see documents listed in the Related Documents. This chapter includes the following sections: ■Information About IP Routing ■Prerequisites ■Guidelines and Limitations ■Configuring IP Addressing ■Enabling IPv4 Unicast Routing ■Configuring RIP ■Configuring OSPF ■Configuring EIGRP ■Configuring BGP ■Configuring ISO CLNS Routing ■Configuring BFD ■Configuring Multi-VRF CE ■Configuring Protocol-Independent Features ■Verifying Configuration ■Related Documents In an IP network, each subnetwork is mapped to an individual VLAN. However, network devices in different VLANs cannot communicate with one another without a Layer 3 device (router) to route traffic between the VLAN, referred to as inter-VLAN routing. You configure one or more routers to route traffic to the appropriate destination VLAN. Figure 99 shows a basic routing topology. Switch A is in VLAN 10, and Switch B is in VLAN 20. The router has an interface in each VLAN. Figure 99 Routing Topology Example When Host A in VLAN 10 needs to communicate with Host B in VLAN 10, it sends a packet addressed to that host. Switch A forwards the packet directly to Host B, without sending it to the router. When Host A sends a packet to Host C in VLAN 20, Switch A forwards the packet to the router, which receives the traffic on the VLAN 10 interface. The router checks the routing table, finds the correct outgoing interface, and forwards the packet on the VLAN 20 interface to Switch B. Switch B receives the packet and forwards it to Host C. Routers and Layer 3 switches can route packets in the following ways: ■By using default routing—sending traffic with a destination unknown to the router to a default outlet or destination. ■By using preprogrammed static routes for the traffic Static unicast routing forwards packets from predetermined ports through a single path into and out of a network. Static routing does not automatically respond to changes in the network and therefore, might result in unreachable destinations. ■By dynamically calculating routes by using a routing protocol Dynamic routing protocols are used by routers to dynamically calculate the best route for forwarding traffic. Routing protocols supported by the switch are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), and Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). ■In order to use dynamic routing protocols, an IP Services License is needed. ■To support VLAN interfaces, create and configure VLANs on the switch, and assign VLAN membership to Layer 2 interfaces. ■By default, IPv4 routing is disabled on the switch, and you must enable it before routing can take place. See Enabling IPv4 Unicast Routing. ■We recommend that you configure the BFD interval parameters on an interface before configuring the routing protocol commands, especially when using EIGRP. For information about BFD, see Configuring BFD. ■In the following procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces: –A routed port: a physical port configured as a Layer 3 port by using the no switchport interface configuration command. –A switch virtual interface (SVI): a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id global configuration command and by default a Layer 3 interface. –An EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port- channel-number global configuration command and binding the Ethernet interface into the channel group. ■The switch does not support tunnel interfaces for unicast routed traffic. ■All Layer 3 interfaces on which routing will occur must have IP addresses assigned to them. See Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces. ■A Layer 3 switch can have an IP address assigned to each routed port and SVI. The number of routed ports and SVIs that you can configure is not limited by software. However, the interrelationship between this number and the number and volume of features being implemented might have an impact on CPU utilization because of hardware limitations. To support IPv4 routing, use the sdm prefer default global configuration command to set the Switch Database Management (sdm) feature to balance resources. For more information on the SDM templates, see the sdm prefer command in the command reference listed in the Related Documents. Configuring IPv4 routing consists of several main procedures: ■Configure Layer 3 interfaces. ■Enable IPv4 routing on the switch. ■Assign IPv4 addresses to the Layer 3 interfaces. ■Enable selected routing protocols on the switch. ■Configure routing protocol parameters (optional). IP routing requires that Layer 3 network interfaces are assigned IP addresses to enable the interfaces and to allow communication with the hosts on interfaces that use IP. These sections describe how to configure various IP addressing features. Assigning IP addresses to the interface is required; the other procedures are optional. ■Default Addressing Configuration ■Assigning IP Addresses to Network Interfaces ■Configuring Address Resolution Methods ■Routing Assistance When IP Routing is Disabled ■Configuring Broadcast Packet Handling ■Monitoring and Maintaining IP Addressing
An IP address identifies a location to which IP packets can be sent. An interface can have one primary IP address. A mask identifies the bits that denote the network number in an IP address. When you use the mask to subnet a network, the mask is referred to as a subnet mask. To receive an assigned network number, contact your Internet service provider.
Enabling subnet zero provides the ability to configure and route to subnet 0 subnets. You can use the all ones subnet (131.108.255.0) and even though it is discouraged, you can enable the use of subnet zero if you need the entire subnet space for your IP address. Subnetting with a subnet address of zero is strongly discouraged because of the problems that can arise if a network and a subnet have the same addresses. For example, if network 131.108.0.0 is subnetted as 255.255.255.0, subnet zero would be written as 131.108.0.0, which is the same as the network address.
Use the no ip subnet-zero global configuration command to restore the default and disable the use of subnet zero. By default, classless routing behavior is enabled on the switch when it is configured to route. With classless routing, if a router receives packets for a subnet of a network with no default route, the router forwards the packet to the best supernet route. A supernet consists of contiguous blocks of Class C address spaces used to simulate a single, larger address space and is designed to relieve the pressure on the rapidly depleting Class B address space. In Figure 100, classless routing is enabled. When the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, instead of discarding the packet, the router forwards it to the best supernet route. If you disable classless routing and a router receives packets destined for a subnet of a network with no network default route, the router discards the packet. Figure 100 IP Classless Routing In Figure 101, the router in network 128.20.0.0 is connected to subnets 128.20.1.0, 128.20.2.0, and 128.20.3.0. If the host sends a packet to 120.20.4.1, because there is no network default route, the router discards the packet. Figure 101 No IP Classless Routing To prevent the switch from forwarding packets destined for unrecognized subnets to the best supernet route possible, you can disable classless routing behavior. Review the Information About IP Routing.
To restore the default and have the switch forward packets destined for a subnet of a network with no network default route to the best supernet route possible, use the ip classless global configuration command. You can control interface-specific handling of IP by using address resolution. A device using IP can have both a local address or MAC address, which uniquely defines the device on its local segment or LAN, and a network address, which identifies the network to which the device belongs. To communicate with a device on Ethernet, the software must learn the MAC address of the device. The process of learning the MAC address from an IP address is called address resolution . The process of learning the IP address from the MAC address is called reverse address resolution . The switch can use these forms of address resolution: ■Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to associate IP address with MAC addresses. Taking an IP address as input, ARP learns the associated MAC address and then stores the IP address/MAC address association in an ARP cache for rapid retrieval. Then the IP datagram is encapsulated in a link-layer frame and sent over the network. Encapsulation of IP datagrams and ARP requests or replies on IEEE 802 networks other than Ethernet is specified by the Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP). ■Proxy ARP helps hosts with no routing tables learn the MAC addresses of hosts on other networks or subnets. If the switch (router) receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same interface as the ARP request sender, and if the router has all of its routes to the host through other interfaces, it generates a proxy ARP packet giving its own local data link address. The host that sent the ARP request then sends its packets to the router, which forwards them to the intended host. The switch also uses the Reverse Address Resolution Protocol (RARP), which functions the same as ARP does, except that the RARP packets request an IP address instead of a local MAC address. Using RARP requires a RARP server on the same network segment as the router interface. Use the ip rarp-server address interface configuration command to identify the server. For more information on RARP, see IP Addressing: ARP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. You can perform these tasks to configure address resolution: ■Defining a Static ARP Cache ■Setting ARP Encapsulation ■Enabling Proxy ARP ARP and other address resolution protocols provide dynamic mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses. Because most hosts support dynamic address resolution, you usually do not need to specify static ARP cache entries. If you must define a static ARP cache entry, you can do so globally, which installs a permanent entry in the ARP cache that the switch uses to translate IP addresses into MAC addresses. Optionally, you can also specify that the switch respond to ARP requests as if it were the owner of the specified IP address. If you do not want the ARP entry to be permanent, you can specify a timeout period for the ARP entry. Review the Configuring Address Resolution Methods.
To remove an entry from the ARP cache, use the no arp ip-address hardware-address type global configuration command. To remove all nonstatic entries from the ARP cache, use the clear arp-cache privileged EXEC command. By default, Ethernet ARP encapsulation (represented by the arpa keyword) is enabled on an IP interface. You can change the encapsulation methods to SNAP if required by your network. The encapsulation type specified in this procedure should match the encapsulation type specified in the Defining a Static ARP Cache.
To disable an encapsulation type, use the no arp arpa or no arp snap interface configuration command. By default, the switch uses proxy ARP to help hosts learn MAC addresses of hosts on other networks or subnets. Follow these steps to enable proxy ARP if it has been disabled. Review the Configuring Address Resolution Methods.
To disable proxy ARP on the interface, use the no ip proxy-arp interface configuration command. These mechanisms allow the switch to learn about routes to other networks when it does not have IP routing enabled: ■Proxy ARP ■Default Gateway ■ICMP Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) Proxy ARP, the most common method for learning about other routes, enables an Ethernet host with no routing information to communicate with hosts on other networks or subnets. The host assumes that all hosts are on the same local Ethernet and that they can use ARP to learn their MAC addresses. If a switch receives an ARP request for a host that is not on the same network as the sender, the switch evaluates whether it has the best route to that host. If it does, it sends an ARP reply packet with its own Ethernet MAC address, and the host that sent the request sends the packet to the switch, which forwards it to the intended host. Proxy ARP treats all networks as if they are local and performs ARP requests for every IP address. Proxy ARP is enabled by default. To enable it after it has been disabled, see Enabling Proxy ARP. Proxy ARP works as long as other routers support it. Another method for locating routes is to define a default router or default gateway. All nonlocal packets are sent to this router, which either routes them appropriately or sends an IP Control Message Protocol (ICMP) redirect message back, defining which local router the host should use. The switch caches the redirect messages and forwards each packet as efficiently as possible. A limitation of this method is that there is no means of detecting when the default router has gone down or is unavailable.
Use the no ip default-gateway global configuration command to disable this function. Router discovery allows the switch to dynamically learn about routes to other networks using IRDP. IRDP allows hosts to locate routers. When operating as a client, the switch generates router discovery packets. When operating as a host, the switch receives router discovery packets. The switch can also listen to Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing updates and use this information to infer locations of routers. The switch does not actually store the routing tables sent by routing devices; it merely keeps track of which systems are sending the data. The advantage of using IRDP is that it allows each router to specify both a priority and the time after which a device is assumed to be down if no further packets are received. Each device discovered becomes a candidate for the default router, and a new highest-priority router is selected when a higher priority router is discovered, when the current default router is declared down, or when a TCP connection is about to time out because of excessive retransmissions. The only required task for IRDP routing on an interface is to enable IRDP processing on that interface. When enabled, the default parameters apply. You can optionally change any of these parameters. ■The ip irdp multicast command allows for compatibility with Sun Microsystems Solaris, which requires IRDP packets to be sent out as multicasts. Many implementations cannot receive these multicasts; ensure end-host ability before using this command. ■If you change the maxadvertinterval value, the holdtime and minadvertinterval values also change, so it is important to first change the maxadvertinterval value before manually changing either the holdtime or minadvertinterval values.
Use the no ip irdp interface configuration command to disable IRDP routing. After configuring an IP interface address, you can enable routing and configure one or more routing protocols, or you can configure the way the switch responds to network broadcasts. A broadcast is a data packet destined for all hosts on a physical network. The switch supports two kinds of broadcasting: ■A directed broadcast packet is sent to a specific network or series of networks. A directed broadcast address includes the network or subnet fields. ■A flooded broadcast packet is sent to every network. Note: You can also limit broadcast, unicast, and multicast traffic on Layer 2 interfaces by using the storm-control interface configuration command to set traffic suppression levels. Routers provide some protection from broadcast storms by limiting their extent to the local cable. Bridges (including intelligent bridges), because they are Layer 2 devices, forward broadcasts to all network segments, thus propagating broadcast storms. The best solution to the broadcast storm problem is to use a single broadcast address scheme on a network. In most modern IP implementations, you can set the address to be used as the broadcast address. The switch supports several addressing schemes for forwarding broadcast messages. ■Enabling Directed Broadcast-to-Physical Broadcast Translation ■Forwarding UDP Broadcast Packets and Protocols ■Establishing an IP Broadcast Address ■Flooding IP Broadcasts By default, IP-directed broadcasts are not forwarded; they are dropped to make routers less susceptible to denial-of-service attacks. You can enable forwarding of IP-directed broadcasts on an interface where the broadcast becomes a physical (MAC-layer) broadcast. Only those protocols configured by using the ip forward-protocol global configuration command are forwarded. You can specify an access list to control which broadcasts are forwarded. Only those IP packets permitted by the access list are eligible to be translated from directed broadcasts to physical broadcasts.
Use the no ip directed-broadcast interface configuration command to disable translation of directed broadcast to physical broadcasts. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to remove a protocol or port. The following example enables forwarding of IP directed broadcasts on Ethernet interface 0. The ip forward-protocol command using the udp keyword without specifying any port numbers allows forwarding of UDP packets on the default ports. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is an IP host-to-host layer protocol that provides a low-overhead, connectionless session between two end systems and does not provide for acknowledgment of received datagrams. Network hosts occasionally use UDP broadcasts to find address, configuration, and name information. If such a host is on a network segment that does not include a server, UDP broadcasts are normally not forwarded. You can configure an interface on a router to forward certain classes of broadcasts to a helper address. You can use more than one helper address per interface. You can specify a UDP destination port to control which UDP services are forwarded. You can specify multiple UDP protocols. You can also specify the Network Disk (ND) protocol, which is used by older diskless Sun workstations and the network security protocol SDNS. By default, both UDP and ND forwarding are enabled if a helper address has been defined for an interface. If you do not specify any UDP ports when you configure the forwarding of UDP broadcasts, you are configuring the router to act as a BOOTP forwarding agent. BOOTP packets carry DHCP information. See the description for the ip forward-protocol interface configuration command in the Cisco IOS IP Application Services Command Reference for the list of ports that are forwarded by default if you do not specify any UDP ports.
Use the no ip helper-address interface configuration command to disable the forwarding of broadcast packets to specific addresses. Use the no ip forward-protocol global configuration command to remove a protocol or port. The following example defines a helper address and uses the ip forward-protocol command. Using the udp keyword without specifying any port numbers will allow forwarding of UDP packets on the default ports. The most popular IP broadcast address (and the default) is an address consisting of all ones (255.255.255.255). However, the switch can be configured to generate any form of IP broadcast address.
To restore the default IP broadcast address, use the no ip broadcast-address interface configuration command. The following example specifies an IP broadcast address of 0.0.0.0: You can allow IP broadcasts to be flooded throughout your internetwork in a controlled fashion by using the database created by the bridging STP. Using this feature also prevents loops. To support this capability, bridging must be configured on each interface that is to participate in the flooding. If bridging is not configured on an interface, the interface can receive broadcasts but it never forwards the broadcasts it receives, and the router never uses that interface to send broadcasts received on a different interface. Packets that are forwarded to a single network address using the IP helper-address mechanism can be flooded. Only one copy of the packet is sent on each network segment. To be considered for flooding, packets must meet these criteria. (Note that these are the same conditions used to consider packet forwarding using IP helper addresses.) ■The packet must be a MAC-level broadcast. ■The packet must be an IP-level broadcast. ■The packet must be a TFTP, DNS, Time, NetBIOS, ND, or BOOTP packet, or a UDP specified by the ip forward-protocol udp global configuration command. ■The time-to-live (TTL) value of the packet must be at least two. A flooded UDP datagram is given the destination address specified with the ip broadcast-address interface configuration command on the output interface. The destination address can be set to any address so it might change as the datagram propagates through the network. The source address is never changed. The TTL value is decremented. When a flooded UDP datagram is sent out an interface (and the destination address possibly changed), the datagram is handed to the normal IP output routines and is, therefore, subject to access lists, if they are present on the output interface. Ensure that bridging is configured on each interface that is to participate in the flooding.
Use the no ip forward-protocol spanning-tree global configuration command to disable the flooding of IP broadcasts. The following example permits IP broadcasts to be flooded through the internetwork in a controlled fashion: In the switch, the majority of packets are forwarded in hardware; most packets do not go through the switch CPU. For those packets that do go to the CPU, you can speed up spanning tree-based UDP flooding by a factor of about four to five times by using turbo-flooding. This feature is supported over Ethernet interfaces configured for ARP encapsulation. Enable the flooding of IP broadcasts as described in the Flooding IP Broadcasts.
To disable this feature, use the no ip forward-protocol turbo-flood global configuration command. The following example shows how to speed up the flooding of UDP packets using the spanning-tree algorithm: When the contents of a particular cache, table, or database have become or are suspected to be invalid, you can remove all its contents by using the clear privileged EXEC commands.
You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases; the reachability of nodes; and the routing path that packets are taking through the network.
By default, the switch is in Layer 2 switching mode and IP routing is disabled. To use the Layer 3 capabilities of the switch, you must enable IP routing. Review the Guidelines and Limitations.
Use the no ip routing global configuration command to disable routing. This example shows how to enable IP routing using RIP as the routing protocol: The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) used in small, homogeneous networks. It is a distance-vector routing protocol that uses broadcast User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets to exchange routing information. You can find detailed information about RIP in IP Routing Fundamentals, published by Cisco Press. Using RIP, the switch sends routing information updates (advertisements) every 30 seconds. If a router does not receive an update from another router for 180 seconds or more, it marks the routes served by that router as unusable. If there is still no update after 240 seconds, the router removes all routing table entries for the non-updating router. RIP uses hop counts to rate the value of different routes. The hop count is the number of routers that can be traversed in a route. A directly connected network has a hop count of zero; a network with a hop count of 16 is unreachable. This small range (0 to 15) makes RIP unsuitable for large networks. If the router has a default network path, RIP advertises a route that links the router to the pseudonetwork 0.0.0.0. The 0.0.0.0 network does not exist, but is treated by RIP as a network to implement default routing. The switch advertises the default network if a default was learned by RIP or if the router has a gateway of last resort and RIP is configured with a default metric. RIP sends updates to the interfaces in specified networks. If an interface’s network is not specified, it is not advertised in any RIP update. This section includes the following topics: ■Default RIP Configuration ■Configuring Basic RIP Parameters ■Configuring RIP Authentication ■Configuring Split Horizon
To configure RIP, you enable RIP routing for a network and optionally configure other parameters. RIP configuration commands are ignored until you configure the network number. Complete the RIP network strategy and planning for your network. For example, you must decide whether to receive and send only RIP Version 1 or RIP Version 2 packets and whether to use RIP authentication. (RIP Version 1 does not support authentication.)
To turn off the RIP routing process, use the no router rip global configuration command. To display the parameters and current state of the active routing protocol process, use the show ip protocols privileged EXEC command. Use the show ip rip database privileged EXEC command to display summary address entries in the RIP database. In the following example, RIP updates are sent to all interfaces on network 10.108.0.0 except Ethernet interface 1. However, in this case, a neighbor router configuration command is included. This command permits the sending of routing updates to specific neighbors. One copy of the routing update is generated per neighbor. RIP Version 1 does not support authentication. If you are sending and receiving RIP Version 2 packets, you can enable RIP authentication on an interface. The key chain specifies the set of keys that can be used on the interface. If a key chain is not configured, no authentication is performed, not even the default. Therefore, you must also perform the tasks in the Managing Authentication Keys. The switch supports two modes of authentication on interfaces for which RIP authentication is enabled: plain text and MD5. The default is plain text. Configure RIP as described in the Configuring Basic RIP Parameters.
To restore clear text authentication, use the no ip rip authentication mode interface configuration command. To prevent authentication, use the no ip rip authentication key-chain interface configuration command. The following example configures the interface to accept and send any key belonging to the key chain named trees and configures the interface to use MD5 authentication: Routers connected to broadcast-type IP networks and using distance-vector routing protocols normally use the split-horizon mechanism to reduce the possibility of routing loops. Split horizon blocks information about routes from being advertised by a router on any interface from which that information originated. This feature can optimize communication among multiple routers when links are broken. In general, Cisco does not recommend disabling split horizon unless you are certain that your application requires disabling it to properly advertise routes.
To enable the split horizon mechanism, use the ip split-horizon interface configuration command. The following simple example disables split horizon on a serial link: To configure an interface running RIP to advertise a summarized local IP address pool on a network access server for dial-up clients, use the ip summary-address rip interface configuration command. Note: If split horizon is enabled, neither autosummary nor interface IP summary addresses are advertised. If the interface is in Layer 2 mode (the default), you must enter a no switchport interface configuration command before entering the ip address interface configuration command.
To disable IP summarization, use the no ip summary-address rip router configuration command. In this example, the major net is 10.0.0.0. The summary address 10.2.0.0 overrides the autosummary address of 10.0.0.0 so that 10.2.0.0 is advertised out interface Gigabit Ethernet port 2, and 10.0.0.0 is not advertised. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP) designed expressly for IP networks, supporting IP subnetting and tagging of externally derived routing information. OSPF also allows packet authentication and uses IP multicast when sending and receiving packets. This section briefly describes how to configure OSPF. For a complete description of the OSPF commands, see the OSPF documents listed in the Related Documents. Note: OSPF classifies different media into broadcast, nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA), or point-to-point networks. Broadcast and nonbroadcast networks can also be configured as point-to-multipoint networks. The switch supports all these network types. The Cisco implementation conforms to the OSPF Version 2 specifications with these key features: ■Definition of stub areas is supported. ■Routes learned through any IP routing protocol can be redistributed into another IP routing protocol. At the intradomain level, this means that OSPF can import routes learned through EIGRP and RIP. OSPF routes can also be exported into RIP. ■Plain text and MD5 authentication among neighboring routers within an area is supported. ■Configurable routing interface parameters include interface output cost, retransmission interval, interface transmit delay, router priority, router dead and hello intervals, and authentication key. ■Virtual links are supported. ■Not-so-stubby-areas (NSSAs) per RFC 1587 are supported. OSPF typically requires coordination among many internal routers, area border routers (ABRs) connected to multiple areas, and autonomous system boundary routers (ASBRs). The minimum configuration would use all default parameter values, no authentication, and interfaces assigned to areas. If you customize your environment, you must ensure coordinated configuration of all routers. This section includes the following topics: ■Default OSPF Configuration ■Nonstop Forwarding Awareness ■Configuring OSPF Interfaces ■Configuring OSPF Network Types ■Configuring OSPF Area Parameters ■Configuring Other OSPF Parameters ■Changing LSA Group Pacing ■Configuring a Loopback Interface ■Monitoring OSPF
OSPF database filter Disabled. All outgoing link-state advertisements (LSAs) are flooded to the interface. IP OSPF name lookup Disabled. Log adjacency changes Enabled. Neighbor None specified. Neighbor database filter Disabled. All outgoing LSAs are flooded to the neighbor. Network area Disabled. NSF1 awareness Enabled2. Allows Layer 3 switches to continue forwarding packets from a neighboring NSF-capable router during hardware or software changes. Router ID No OSPF routing process defined. Summary address Disabled. Timers LSA group pacing 240 seconds. Timers shortest path first (spf) spf delay: 5 seconds. spf-holdtime: 10 seconds. Virtual link No area ID or router ID defined. Hello interval: 10 seconds. Retransmit interval: 5 seconds. Transmit delay: 1 second. Dead interval: 40 seconds. Authentication key: no key predefined. Message-digest key (MD5): no key predefined. The OSPF NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router crashing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a non-disruptive software upgrade. This feature cannot be disabled. For more information about this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S. Enabling OSPF requires that you create an OSPF routing process, specify the range of IP addresses to be associated with the routing process, and assign area IDs to be associated with that range. Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network. For example, you must decide whether multiple areas are required.
To terminate an OSPF routing process, use the no router ospf process-id global configuration command. This example shows how to configure an OSPF routing process and assign it a process number of 109: You can use the ip ospf interface configuration commands to modify interface-specific OSPF parameters. You are not required to modify any of these parameters, but some interface parameters (hello interval, dead interval, and authentication key) must be consistent across all routers in an attached network. Note: The ip ospf interface configuration commands are all optional. If you modify these parameters, be sure all routers in the network have compatible values.
Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or return to the default value. The following example specifies a cost of 65 and sets the interval between link-state advertisement (LSA) retransmissions to 1 second: OSPF classifies different media into the three types of networks by default: ■Broadcast networks (Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI) ■Nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) networks (Switched Multimegabit Data Service [SMDS], Frame Relay, and X.25) ■Point-to-point networks (High-Level Data Link Control [HDLC], PPP) You can also configure network interfaces as either a broadcast or an NBMA network and as point-to point or point-to-multipoint, regardless of the default media type. Because many routers might be attached to an OSPF network, a designated router is selected for the network. If broadcast capability is not configured in the network, the designated router selection requires special configuration parameters. You need to configure these parameters only for devices that are eligible to become the designated router or backup designated router (in other words, routers with a nonzero router priority value). Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.
On point-to-multipoint, nonbroadcast networks, you then use the neighbor router configuration command to identify neighbors. Assigning a cost to a neighbor is optional. The following example declares a router at address 192.168.3.4 on a nonbroadcast network, with a priority of 1 and a poll interval of 180 seconds: You can configure network interfaces as either broadcast or NBMA and as point-to point or point-to-multipoint, regardless of the default media type. An OSPF point-to-multipoint interface is defined as a numbered point-to-point interface with one or more neighbors. On point-to-multipoint broadcast networks, specifying neighbors is optional. When you configure an interface as point-to-multipoint when the media does not support broadcast, you should use the neighbor command to identify neighbors. Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.
Use the no form of the ip ospf network command to return to the default network type for the media. The following example sets your OSPF network as a broadcast network: The following example illustrates a point-to-multipoint network with broadcast: You can optionally configure several OSPF area parameters. These parameters include authentication for password-based protection against unauthorized access to an area, stub areas, and not-so-stubby-areas (NSSAs). Stub areas are areas into which information on external routes is not sent. Instead, the area border router (ABR) generates a default external route into the stub area for destinations outside the autonomous system (AS). An NSSA does not flood all LSAs from the core into the area, but can import AS external routes within the area by redistribution. Route summarization is the consolidation of advertised addresses into a single summary route to be advertised by other areas. If network numbers are contiguous, you can use the area range router configuration command to configure the ABR to advertise a summary route that covers all networks in the range. Note: The OSPF area router configuration commands are all optional. Evaluate the following considerations before you implement this feature: ■You can set a Type 7 default route that can be used to reach external destinations. When configured, the router generates a Type 7 default into the NSSA or the NSSA ABR. ■Every router within the same area must agree that the area is NSSA; otherwise, the routers will not be able to communicate.
Use the no form of these commands to remove the configured parameter value or to return to the default value. The following example mandates authentication for areas 0 and 10.0.0.0 of OSPF routing process 201. Authentication keys are also provided. You can optionally configure other OSPF parameters in router configuration mode. ■Route summarization: When redistributing routes from other protocols as described in the Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information, each route is advertised individually in an external LSA. To help decrease the size of the OSPF link state database, you can use the summary-address router configuration command to advertise a single router for all the redistributed routes included in a specified network address and mask. ■Virtual links: In OSPF, all areas must be connected to a backbone area. You can establish a virtual link in case of a backbone-continuity break by configuring two Area Border Routers as endpoints of a virtual link. Configuration information includes the identity of the other virtual endpoint (the other ABR) and the nonbackbone link that the two routers have in common (the transit area). Virtual links cannot be configured through a stub area. ■Default route: When you specifically configure redistribution of routes into an OSPF routing domain, the route automatically becomes an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR). You can force the ASBR to generate a default route into the OSPF routing domain. ■Domain Name Server (DNS) names for use in all OSPF show privileged EXEC command displays makes it easier to identify a router than displaying it by router ID or neighbor ID. ■Default Metrics: OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface according to the bandwidth of the interface. The metric is calculated as ref-bw divided by bandwidth, where ref is 10 by default, and bandwidth ( bw) is specified by the bandwidth interface configuration command. For multiple links with high bandwidth, you can specify a larger number to differentiate the cost on those links. ■Administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, an integer between 0 and 255, with a higher value meaning a lower trust rating. An administrative distance of 255 means the routing information source cannot be trusted at all and should be ignored. OSPF uses three different administrative distances: routes within an area (interarea), routes to another area (interarea), and routes from another routing domain learned through redistribution (external). You can change any of the distance values. ■Passive interfaces: Because interfaces between two devices on an Ethernet represent only one network segment, to prevent OSPF from sending hello packets for the sending interface, you must configure the sending device to be a passive interface. Both devices can identify each other through the hello packet for the receiving interface. ■Route calculation timers: You can configure the delay time between when OSPF receives a topology change and when it starts the shortest path first (SPF) calculation and the hold time between two SPF calculations. ■Log neighbor changes: You can configure the router to send a syslog message when an OSPF neighbor state changes, providing a high-level view of changes in the router. Complete the OSPF network strategy and planning for your network.
In the following example, the summary address 10.1.0.0 includes address 10.1.1.0, 10.1.2.0, 10.1.3.0, and so on. Only the address 10.1.0.0 is advertised in an external link-state advertisement. The OSPF LSA group pacing feature allows the router to group OSPF LSAs and pace the refreshing, check-summing, and aging functions for more efficient router use. This feature is enabled by default with a 4-minute default pacing interval, and you will not usually need to modify this parameter. The optimum group pacing interval is inversely proportional to the number of LSAs the router is refreshing, check-summing, and aging. For example, if you have approximately 10,000 LSAs in the database, decreasing the pacing interval would benefit you. If you have a very small database (40 to 100 LSAs), increasing the pacing interval to 10 to 20 minutes might benefit you slightly. Do not change the packet pacing timers unless all other options to meet OSPF packet flooding requirements have been exhausted. Specifically, network operators should prefer summarization, stub area usage, queue tuning, and buffer tuning before changing the default flooding timers. Furthermore, there are no guidelines for changing timer values; each OSPF deployment is unique and should be considered on a case-by-case basis. The network operator assumes the risks associated with changing the default timer values.
To return to the default value, use the no timers pacing lsa-group router configuration command. The following example configures OSPF group packet-pacing updates between LSA groups to occur in 60-second intervals for OSPF routing process 1: OSPF uses the highest IP address configured on the interfaces as its router ID. If this interface is down or removed, the OSPF process must recalculate a new router ID and resend all its routing information out its interfaces. If a loopback interface is configured with an IP address, OSPF uses this IP address as its router ID, even if other interfaces have higher IP addresses. Because loopback interfaces never fail, this provides greater stability. OSPF automatically prefers a loopback interface over other interfaces, and it chooses the highest IP address among all loopback interfaces. The IP address for the loopback interface must be unique and not in use by another interface.
Use the no interface loopback 0 global configuration c ommand to disable the loopback interface. You can display specific statistics such as the contents of IP routing tables, caches, and databases. Following are some of the privileged EXEC commands for displaying OSPF statistics. For more show ip ospf database privileged EXEC command options and for explanations of fields in the resulting display, see Cisco IOS IP Routing: OSPF Command Reference.
Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP) is a Cisco proprietary enhanced version of the Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (IGRP). EIGRP uses the same distance vector algorithm and distance information as IGRP; however, the convergence properties and the operating efficiency of EIGRP are significantly improved. The convergence technology employs an algorithm referred to as the Diffusing Update Algorithm (DUAL), which guarantees loop-free operation at every instant throughout a route computation and allows all devices involved in a topology change to synchronize at the same time. Routers that are not affected by topology changes are not involved in recomputations. IP EIGRP provides increased network width. With RIP, the largest possible width of your network is 15 hops. Because the EIGRP metric is large enough to support thousands of hops, the only barrier to expanding the network is the transport-layer hop counter. EIGRP increments the transport control field only when an IP packet has traversed 15 routers and the next hop to the destination was learned through EIGRP. EIGRP has these four basic components: ■ Neighbor discovery and recovery is the process that routers use to dynamically learn of other routers on their directly attached networks. Routers must also discover when their neighbors become unreachable or inoperative. Neighbor discovery and recovery is achieved by periodically sending small hello packets. As long as hello packets are received, the neighbor is alive and functioning. When this status is determined, the neighboring routers exchange routing information. ■The reliable transport protocol is responsible for guaranteed, ordered delivery of EIGRP packets to all neighbors. It supports intermixed transmission of multicast and unicast packets. Some EIGRP packets must be sent reliably, and others need not be. For efficiency, reliability is provided only when necessary. For example, on a multiaccess network that has multicast capabilities, it is not necessary to send hellos reliably to all neighbors individually. Therefore, EIGRP sends a single multicast hello with an indication in the packet informing the receivers that the packet need not be acknowledged. Other types of packets (such as updates) require acknowledgment, which is shown in the packet. To ensure low convergence time, the reliable transport sends multicast packets quickly when there are unacknowledged packets pending. ■The DUAL finite state machine handles the decision process for all route computations. It tracks all routes advertised by all neighbors and uses the distance information (known as a metric) to select efficient, loop-free paths. DUAL selects routes to be inserted into a routing table based on feasible successors. A successor is a neighboring router used for packet forwarding that has a least-cost path to a destination that is guaranteed not to be part of a routing loop. When there are no feasible successors, but there are neighbors advertising the destination, a recomputation must occur to determine a new successor. The amount of time it takes to recompute the route affects the convergence time. When a topology change occurs, DUAL tests for feasible successors to avoid unnecessary recomputation. ■The protocol-dependent modules are responsible for network layer protocol-specific tasks. An example is the IP EIGRP module, which is responsible for sending and receiving EIGRP packets that are encapsulated in IP. It is also responsible for parsing EIGRP packets and informing DUAL of the new information received. Routing decisions are stored in the IP routing table. EIGRP also redistributes routes learned by other IP routing protocols. This section includes the following topics: ■Default EIGRP Configuration ■Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters ■Configuring EIGRP Interfaces ■Configuring EIGRP Route Authentication ■Configuring EIGRP Stub Routing ■Monitoring and Maintaining EIGRP
To create an EIGRP routing process, you must enable EIGRP and associate networks. EIGRP sends updates to the interfaces in the specified networks. If you do not specify an interface network, it is not advertised in any EIGRP update. The EIGRP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade. This feature cannot be disabled. For more information on this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S. In this procedure, configuring the routing process is required; other steps are optional. Complete the EIGRP network strategy and planning for your network.
Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value. The following example configures EIGRP autonomous system 1 and establishes neighbors through networks 172.16.0.0 and 192.168.0.0: Other optional EIGRP parameters can be configured on an interface basis. Enable EIGRP as described in the Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters.
Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or return the setting to the default value. The following example allows EIGRP to use up to 75 percent (42 kbps) of a 56-kbps serial link in autonomous system 209: EIGRP route authentication provides MD5 authentication of routing updates from the EIGRP routing protocol to prevent the introduction of unauthorized or false routing messages from unapproved sources. Enable EIGRP as described in the Configuring Basic EIGRP Parameters.
Use the no forms of these commands to disable the feature or to return the setting to the default value. The following example configures EIGRP to apply authentication to address-family autonomous system 1 and identifies a key chain named SITE1: The EIGRP stub routing feature reduces resource utilization by moving routed traffic closer to the end user. In a network using EIGRP stub routing, the only allowable route for IP traffic to the user is through a switch that is configured with EIGRP stub routing. The switch sends the routed traffic to interfaces that are configured as user interfaces or are connected to other devices. When using EIGRP stub routing, you need to configure the distribution and remote routers to use EIGRP and to configure only the switch as a stub. Only specified routes are propagated from the switch. The switch responds to all queries for summaries, connected routes, and routing updates. Note: EIGRP stub routing only advertises connected or summary routes from the routing tables to other switches in the network. The switch uses EIGRP stub routing at the access layer to eliminate the need for other types of routing advertisements. If you try to configure multi-VRF-CE and EIGRP stub routing at the same time, the configuration is not allowed. Any neighbor that receives a packet informing it of the stub status does not query the stub router for any routes, and a router that has a stub peer does not query that peer. The stub router depends on the distribution router to send the proper updates to all peers. In Figure 102, switch B is configured as an EIGRP stub router. Switches A and C are connected to the rest of the WAN. Switch B advertises connected, static, redistribution, and summary routes to switch A and C. Switch B does not advertise any routes learned from switch A (and the reverse). Figure 102 EIGRP Stub Router Configuration For more information about EIGRP stub routing, see IP Routing: EIGRP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. Complete the EIGRP network strategy and planning for your network.
Enter the show ip eigrp neighbor detail privileged EXEC command from the distribution router to verify the configuration. In the following example, the eigrp stub command is used to configure the router as a stub that advertises connected and summary routes: You can delete neighbors from the neighbor table. You can also display various EIGRP routing statistics.
The Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an exterior gateway protocol used to set up an interdomain routing system for loop-free exchanges of routing information between autonomous systems. Autonomous systems are made up of routers that operate under the same administration and that run Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs), such as RIP or OSPF, within their boundaries and that interconnect by using an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP). BGP Version 4 is the standard EGP for interdomain routing in the Internet. For details about BGP configuration and commands, see the BGP documents listed in Related Documents. Routers that belong to the same autonomous system (AS) and that exchange BGP updates run internal BGP (IBGP), and routers that belong to different autonomous systems and that exchange BGP updates run external BGP (EBGP). Most configuration commands are the same for configuring EBGP and IBGP. The difference is that the routing updates are exchanged either between autonomous systems (EBGP) or within an AS (IBGP). Figure 103 shows a network that is running both EBGP and IBGP. Figure 103 EBGP, IBGP, and Multiple Autonomous Systems Before exchanging information with an external AS, BGP ensures that networks within the AS can be reached by defining internal BGP peering among routers within the AS and by redistributing BGP routing information to IGPs that run within the AS, such as IGRP and OSPF. Routers that run a BGP routing process are often referred to as BGP speakers. BGP uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) as its transport protocol (specifically port 179). Two BGP speakers that have a TCP connection to each other for exchanging routing information are known as peers or neighbors. In Figure 103, Routers A and B are BGP peers, as are Routers B and C and Routers C and D. The routing information is a series of AS numbers that describe the full path to the destination network. BGP uses this information to construct a loop-free map of autonomous systems. The network has these characteristics: ■Routers A and B are running EBGP, and Routers B and C are running IBGP. Note that the EBGP peers are directly connected and that the IBGP peers are not. As long as there is an IGP running that allows the two neighbors to reach one another, IBGP peers do not have to be directly connected. ■All BGP speakers within an AS must establish a peer relationship with each other. That is, the BGP speakers within an AS must be fully meshed logically. BGP4 provides two techniques that reduce the requirement for a logical full mesh: confederations and route reflectors. ■AS 200 is a transit AS for AS 100 and AS 300—that is, AS 200 is used to transfer packets between AS 100 and AS 300. BGP peers initially exchange their full BGP routing tables and then send only incremental updates. BGP peers also exchange keepalive messages (to ensure that the connection is up) and notification messages (in response to errors or special conditions). In BGP, each route consists of a network number, a list of autonomous systems that information has passed through (the autonomous system path), and a list of other path attributes. The primary function of a BGP system is to exchange network reachability information, including information about the list of AS paths, with other BGP systems. This information can be used to determine AS connectivity, to prune routing loops, and to enforce AS-level policy decisions. A router or switch running Cisco IOS does not select or use an IBGP route unless it has a route available to the next-hop router and it has received synchronization from an IGP (unless IGP synchronization is disabled). When multiple routes are available, BGP bases its path selection on attribute values. See Configuring BGP Decision Attributes for information about BGP attributes. BGP Version 4 supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) so you can reduce the size of your routing tables by creating aggregate routes, resulting in supernets. CIDR eliminates the concept of network classes within BGP and supports the advertising of IP prefixes. This section includes the following topics: ■Default BGP Configuration ■Enabling BGP Routing ■Managing Routing Policy Changes ■Configuring BGP Decision Attributes ■Configuring BGP Filtering with Route Maps ■Configuring BGP Filtering by Neighbor ■Configuring Prefix Lists for BGP Filtering ■Configuring BGP Community Filtering ■Configuring BGP Neighbors and Peer Groups ■Configuring Aggregate Addresses ■Configuring Routing Domain Confederations ■Configuring BGP Route Reflectors ■Configuring Route Dampening ■Monitoring and Maintaining BGP
The BGP NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. To enable this feature with BGP routing, you need to enable Graceful Restart. When the neighboring router is NSF-capable, and this feature is enabled, the Layer 3 switch continues to forward packets from the neighboring router during the interval between the primary Route Processor (RP) in a router failing and the backup RP taking over, or while the primary RP is manually reloaded for a nondisruptive software upgrade. For more information, see IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. To enable BGP routing, you establish a BGP routing process and define the local network. Because BGP must completely recognize the relationships with its neighbors, you must also specify a BGP neighbor. BGP supports two kinds of neighbors: internal and external. Internal neighbors are in the same AS; external neighbors are in different autonomous systems. External neighbors are usually adjacent to each other and share a subnet, but internal neighbors can be anywhere in the same AS. The switch supports the use of private AS numbers, usually assigned by service providers and given to systems whose routes are not advertised to external neighbors. The private AS numbers are from 64512 to 65535. You can configure external neighbors to remove private AS numbers from the AS path by using the neighbor remove-private-as router configuration command. Then when an update is passed to an external neighbor, if the AS path includes private AS numbers, these numbers are dropped. If your AS must pass traffic through it from another AS to a third AS, it is important to be consistent about the routes it advertises. If BGP advertises a route before all routers in the network learn about the route through the IGP, the AS might receive traffic that some routers can not yet route. To prevent this from happening, BGP must wait until the IGP has propagated information across the AS so that BGP is synchronized with the IGP. Synchronization is enabled by default. If your AS does not pass traffic from one AS to another AS, or if all routers in your autonomous systems are running BGP, you can disable synchronization, which allows your network to carry fewer routes in the IGP and allows BGP to converge more quickly. You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring BGP. Gather the network requirements you need, which should include the following: ■Whether you need to run IBGP for internal connectivity ■External connectivity to the service provider network ■Configuration parameters such as neighbor IP addresses and their AS number, and which networks you will advertise through BGP
Use the no router bgp autonomous-system global configuration command to remove a BGP AS. Use the no network network-number router configuration command to remove the network from the BGP table. Use the no neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remote-as number router configuration command to remove a neighbor. Use the no neighbor { ip-address | peer-group-name } remove-private-as router configuration command to include private AS numbers in updates to a neighbor. Use the synchronization router configuration command to re-enable synchronization. These examples show how to configure BGP on the routers in Figure 103. Router A: Router B: Router C: Router D: To verify that BGP peers are running, use the show ip bgp neighbors privileged EXEC command. This is the output of this command on Router A: Anything other than state = established means that the peers are not running. The remote router ID is the highest IP address on that router (or the highest loopback interface). Each time the table is updated with new information, the table version number increments. A table version number that continually increments means that a route is flapping, causing continual routing updates. For exterior protocols, a reference to an IP network from the network router configuration command controls only which networks are advertised. This is in contrast to Interior Gateway Protocols (IGPs), such as EIGRP, which also use the network command to specify where to send updates. Routing policies for a peer include all the configurations that might affect inbound or outbound routing table updates. When you have defined two routers as BGP neighbors, they form a BGP connection and exchange routing information. If you later change a BGP filter, weight, distance, version, or timer, or make a similar configuration change, you must reset the BGP sessions so that the configuration changes take effect. There are two types of reset: hard reset and soft reset. The switch supports a soft reset without any prior configuration when both BGP peers support the soft route refresh capability, which is advertised in the OPEN message sent when the peers establish a TCP session. A soft reset allows the dynamic exchange of route refresh requests and routing information between BGP routers and the subsequent re-advertisement of the respective outbound routing table. ■When soft reset generates inbound updates from a neighbor, it is called dynamic inbound soft reset. ■When soft reset sends a set of updates to a neighbor, it is called outbound soft reset. A soft inbound reset causes the new inbound policy to take effect. A soft outbound reset causes the new local outbound policy to take effect without resetting the BGP session. As a new set of updates is sent during outbound policy reset, a new inbound policy can also take effect.
Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
In the following example, an outbound soft reset is initiated for sessions with all routers in the autonomous system numbered 35700: When a BGP speaker receives updates from multiple autonomous systems that describe different paths to the same destination, it must choose the single best path for reaching that destination. The decision is based on the value of attributes that the update contains and other BGP-configurable factors. The selected path is entered into the BGP routing table and propagated to its neighbors. When a BGP peer learns two EBGP paths for a prefix from a neighboring AS, it chooses the best path and inserts that path in the IP routing table. If BGP multipath support is enabled and the EBGP paths are learned from the same neighboring autonomous systems, multiple paths are installed in the IP routing table. Then, during packet switching, per-packet or per-destination load balancing is performed among the multiple paths. The maximum-paths router configuration command controls the number of paths allowed. These factors summarize the order in which BGP evaluates the attributes for choosing the best path: 1. If the path specifies a next hop that is inaccessible, drop the update. The BGP next-hop attribute, automatically determined by the software, is the IP address of the next hop that is going to be used to reach a destination. For EBGP, this is usually the IP address of the neighbor specified by the neighbor remote-as router configuration command. You can disable next-hop processing by using route maps or the neighbor next-hop-self router configuration command. 2. Prefer the path with the largest weight (a Cisco proprietary parameter). The weight attribute is local to the router and not propagated in routing updates. By default, the weight attribute is 32768 for paths that the router originates and zero for other paths. You can use access lists, route maps, or the neighbor weight router configuration command to set weights. 3. Prefer the route with the highest local preference. Local preference is part of the routing update and exchanged among routers in the same AS. The default value of the local preference attribute is 100. You can set local preference by using the bgp default local-preference router configuration command or by using a route map. 4. Prefer the route that was originated by BGP running on the local router. 5. Prefer the route with the shortest AS path. 6. Prefer the route with the lowest origin type. An interior route or IGP is lower than a route learned by EGP, and an EGP-learned route is lower than one of unknown origin or learned in another way. 7. Prefer the route with the lowest multi-exit discriminator (MED) metric attribute if the neighboring AS is the same for all routes considered. You can configure the MED by using route maps or by using the default-metric router configuration command. When an update is sent to an IBGP peer, the MED is included. 8. Prefer the external (EBGP) path over the internal (IBGP) path. 9. Prefer the route that can be reached through the closest IGP neighbor (the lowest IGP metric). This means that the router will prefer the shortest internal path within the AS to reach the destination (the shortest path to the BGP next-hop). 10. If these conditions are all true, insert the route for this path into the IP routing table:
11. If multipath is not enabled, prefer the route with the lowest IP address value for the BGP router ID. The router ID is usually the highest IP address on the router or the loopback (virtual) address, but might be implementation-specific. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
Use the no form of each command to return to the default state. The following example forces all updates destined for 10.108.1.1 to advertise this router as the next hop: In the following example, the local BGP routing process is configured to compare the MED from alternative paths, regardless of the autonomous system from which the paths are received: Within BGP, you can use route maps to control and to modify routing information and to define the conditions by which routes are redistributed between routing domains. See Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information for more information about route maps. Each route map has a name that identifies the route map ( map tag) and an optional sequence number. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
Use the no route-map map-tag command to delete the route map. Use the no set ip next-hop ip-address command to re-enable next-hop processing. In the following example, the inbound route map named rmap sets the next hop: You can filter BGP advertisements by using AS-path filters, such as the as-path access-list global configuration command and the neighbor filter-list router configuration command. You can also use access lists with the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. Distribute-list filters are applied to network numbers. See Controlling Advertising and Processing in Routing Updates for information about the distribute-list command. You can use route maps on a per-neighbor basis to filter updates and to modify various attributes. A route map can be applied to either inbound or outbound updates. Only the routes that pass the route map are sent or accepted in updates. On both inbound and outbound updates, matching is supported based on AS path, community, and network numbers. Autonomous-system path matching requires the match as-path access-lis t route-map command, community-based matching requires the match community-list route-map command, and network-based matching requires the ip access-list global configuration command. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
Use the no neighbor distribute-list command to remove the access list from the neighbor. Use the no neighbor route-map map-tag router configuration command to remove the route map from the neighbor. The following router configuration mode example applies list 39 to incoming advertisements from neighbor172.16.4.1. List 39 permits the advertisement of network 10.109.0.0. Another method of filtering is to specify an access list filter on both incoming and outbound updates, based on the BGP autonomous system paths. Each filter is an access list based on regular expressions. (See Using Regular Expressions in BGP for more information on forming regular expressions.) To use this method, define an autonomous system path access list, and apply it to updates to and from particular neighbors. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
In the following example, an autonomous system path access list (number 500) is defined to configure the router to not advertise any path through or from autonomous system 65535 to the 10.20.2.2 neighbor: You can use prefix lists as an alternative to access lists in many BGP route filtering commands, including the neighbor distribute-list router configuration command. Filtering by a prefix list involves matching the prefixes of routes with those listed in the prefix list, as when matching access lists. When there is a match, the route is used. Whether a prefix is permitted or denied is based upon these rules: ■An empty prefix list permits all prefixes. ■An implicit deny is assumed if a given prefix does not match any entries in a prefix list. ■When multiple entries of a prefix list match a given prefix, the sequence number of a prefix list entry identifies the entry with the lowest sequence number. By default, sequence numbers are generated automatically and incremented in units of five. If you disable the automatic generation of sequence numbers, you must specify the sequence number for each entry. You can specify sequence values in any increment. If you specify increments of one, you cannot insert additional entries into the list; if you choose very large increments, you might run out of values. You do not need to specify a sequence number when removing a configuration entry. Show commands include the sequence numbers in their output. Before using a prefix list in a command, you must set up the prefix list. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
To delete a prefix list and all of its entries, use the no ip prefix-list list-name global configuration command. To delete an entry from a prefix list, use the no ip prefix-list seq seq-value global configuration command. To disable automatic generation of sequence numbers, use the no ip prefix-list sequence number command; to reenable automatic generation, use the ip prefix-list sequence number command. To clear the hit-count table of prefix list entries, use the clear ip prefix-list privileged EXEC command. In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny the default route 0.0.0.0/0: In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit traffic from the 172.16.1.0/24 subnet: In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit routes from the 10.0.0.0/8 network that have a mask length that is less than or equal to 24 bits: In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny routes from the 10.0.0.0/8 network that have a mask length that is greater than or equal to 25 bits: In the following example, a prefix list is configured to permit routes from any network that have a mask length from 8 to 24 bits: In the following example, a prefix list is configured to deny any route with any mask length from the 10.0.0.0/8 network: One way that BGP controls the distribution of routing information based on the value of the COMMUNITIES attribute. A community is a group of destinations that share some common attribute. Each destination can belong to multiple communities. AS administrators can define to which communities a destination belongs. By default, all destinations belong to the general Internet community. The community is identified by the COMMUNITIES attribute, an optional, transitive, global attribute in the numerical range from 1 to 4294967200. These are some predefined, well-known communities: ■ internet —Advertise this route to the Internet community. All routers belong to it. ■ no-export —Do not advertise this route to EBGP peers. ■ no-advertise —Do not advertise this route to any peer (internal or external). ■ local-as — Do not advertise this route to peers outside the local autonomous system. Based on the community, you can control which routing information to accept, prefer, or distribute to other neighbors. A BGP speaker can set, append, or modify the community of a route when learning, advertising, or redistributing routes. When routes are aggregated, the resulting aggregate has a COMMUNITIES attribute that contains all communities from all the initial routes. You can use community lists to create groups of communities to use in a match clause of a route map. As with an access list, a series of community lists can be created. Statements are checked until a match is found. As soon as one statement is satisfied, the test is concluded. To set the COMMUNITIES attribute and match clauses based on communities, see the match community-list and set community route-map configuration commands in the Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information. By default, no COMMUNITIES attribute is sent to a neighbor. You can specify that the COMMUNITIES attribute be sent to the neighbor at an IP address by using the neighbor send-community router configuration command. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
In the following example, a standard community list is configured that permits routes from network 10 in autonomous system 50000: In the following router configuration mode example, the router belongs to autonomous system 109 and is configured to send the communities attribute to its neighbor at IP address 172.16.70.23: In the following example, a router that uses the 32-bit number community format is upgraded to use the AA:NN format: The following sample output shows how BGP community numbers are displayed when the ip bgp-community new-format command is enabled: Often many BGP neighbors are configured with the same update policies (that is, the same outbound route maps, distribute lists, filter lists, update source, and so on). Neighbors with the same update policies can be grouped into peer groups to simplify configuration and to make updating more efficient. When you have configured many peers, we recommend this approach. To configure a BGP peer group, you create the peer group, assign options to the peer group, and add neighbors as peer group members. You configure the peer group by using the neighbor router configuration commands. By default, peer group members inherit all the configuration options of the peer group, including the remote-as (if configured), version, update-source, out-route-map, out-filter-list, out-dist-list, minimum-advertisement-interval, and next-hop-self. All peer group members also inherit changes made to the peer group. Members can also be configured to override the options that do not affect outbound updates. To assign configuration options to an individual neighbor, specify any of these router configuration commands by using the neighbor IP address. To assign the options to a peer group, specify any of the commands by using the peer group name. You can disable a BGP peer or peer group without removing all the configuration information by using the neighbor shutdown router configuration command. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
To disable an existing BGP neighbor or neighbor peer group, use the neighbor shutdown router configuration command. To enable a previously existing neighbor or neighbor peer group that had been disabled, use the no neighbor shutdown router configuration command. The following example configures a peer group and sets the minimum time between sending BGP routing updates to 10 seconds for the peer group: Classless interdomain routing (CIDR) enables you to create aggregate routes (or supernets) to minimize the size of routing tables. You can configure aggregate routes in BGP either by redistributing an aggregate route into BGP or by creating an aggregate entry in the BGP routing table. An aggregate address is added to the BGP table when there is at least one more specific entry in the BGP table. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
To delete an aggregate entry, use the no aggregate-address address mask router configuration command. To return options to the default values, use the command with keywords. In the following example, an aggregate BGP address is created in router configuration mode. The path advertised for this route will be an AS_SET consisting of all elements contained in all paths that are being summarized. In the following example, a route map called MAP-ONE is created to match on an AS-path access list. The path advertised for this route will be an AS_SET consisting of elements contained in paths that are matched in the route map. One way to reduce the IBGP mesh is to divide an autonomous system into multiple subautonomous systems and to group them into a single confederation that appears as a single autonomous system. Each autonomous system is fully meshed within itself and has a few connections to other autonomous systems in the same confederation. Even though the peers in different autonomous systems have EBGP sessions, they exchange routing information as if they were IBGP peers. Specifically, the next hop, MED, and local preference information is preserved. You can then use a single IGP for all of the autonomous systems. To configure a BGP confederation, you must specify a confederation identifier that acts as the autonomous system number for the group of autonomous systems. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
In the following example, the routing domain is divided into autonomous systems 50001, 50002, 50003, 50004, 50005, and 50006 and is identified by the confederation identifier 50007. Neighbor 10.2.3.4 is a peer inside of the routing domain confederation. Neighbor 10.4.5.6 is a peer outside of the routing domain confederation. To external peers and routing domains, the confederation appears as a single autonomous system with the number 50007. BGP requires that all of the IBGP speakers be fully meshed. When a router receives a route from an external neighbor, it must advertise it to all internal neighbors. To prevent a routing information loop, all IBPG speakers must be connected. The internal neighbors do not send routes learned from internal neighbors to other internal neighbors. With route reflectors, all IBGP speakers need not be fully meshed because another method is used to pass learned routes to neighbors. When you configure an internal BGP peer to be a route reflector, it is responsible for passing IBGP learned routes to a set of IBGP neighbors. The internal peers of the route reflector are divided into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers ( all the other routers in the autonomous system). A route reflector reflects routes between these two groups. The route reflector and its client peers form a cluster. The nonclient peers must be fully meshed with each other, but the client peers need not be fully meshed. The clients in the cluster do not communicate with IBGP speakers outside their cluster. When the route reflector receives an advertised route, it takes one of these actions, depending on the neighbor: ■A route from an external BGP speaker is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers. ■A route from a nonclient peer is advertised to all clients. ■A route from a client is advertised to all clients and nonclient peers. Hence, the clients need not be fully meshed. Usually a cluster of clients have a single route reflector, and the cluster is identified by the route reflector router ID. To increase redundancy and to avoid a single point of failure, a cluster might have more than one route reflector. In this case, all route reflectors in the cluster must be configured with the same 4-byte cluster ID so that a route reflector can recognize updates from route reflectors in the same cluster. All the route reflectors serving a cluster should be fully meshed and should have identical sets of client and nonclient peers. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
In the following router configuration mode example, the local router is a route reflector. It passes learned IBGP routes to the neighbor at 172.16.70.24. Route flap dampening minimizes the propagation of flapping routes across an internetwork. A route is considered to be flapping when it is repeatedly available, then unavailable, then available, then unavailable, and so on. When route dampening is enabled, a numeric penalty value is assigned to a route when it flaps. When a route’s accumulated penalties reach a configurable limit, BGP suppresses advertisements of the route, even if the route is running. The reuse limit is a configurable value that is compared with the penalty. If the penalty is less than the reuse limit, a suppressed route that is up is advertised again. Dampening is not applied to routes that are learned by IBGP. This policy prevents the IBGP peers from having a higher penalty for routes external to the AS. Enable BGP routing as described in the Enabling BGP Routing.
To disable flap dampening, use the no bgp dampening router configuration command without keywords. To set dampening factors back to the default values, use the no bgp dampening router configuration command with values. In the following example, BGP dampening is applied to prefixes filtered through the route-map named BLUE: You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. This might be necessary when the contents of the particular structure have become or are suspected to be invalid. You can display specific statistics, such as the contents of BGP routing tables, caches, and databases. You can use the information to get resource utilization and solve network problems. You can also display information about node reachability and discover the routing path your device’s packets are taking through the network.
You can also enable the logging of messages generated when a BGP neighbor resets, comes up, or goes down by using the bgp log-neighbor changes router configuration command. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) protocol is a standard for the network layer of the Open System Interconnection (OSI) model. Addresses in the ISO network architecture are referred to as network service access point (NSAP) addresses and network entity titles (NETs). Each node in an OSI network has one or more NETs. In addition, each node has many NSAP addresses. When you enable connectionless routing on the switch by using the clns routing global configuration command, the switch makes only forwarding decisions, with no routing-related functionality. For dynamic routing, you must also enable a routing protocol. The switch supports the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) dynamic routing protocols for ISO CLNS networks. This routing protocol supports the concept of areas. Within an area, all routers know how to reach all the system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the proper area. IS-IS supports two levels of routing: station routing (within an area) and area routing (between areas). The key difference between the ISO IGRP and IS-IS NSAP addressing schemes is in the definition of area addresses. Both use the system ID for Level 1 routing (routing within an area). However, they differ in the way addresses are specified for area routing. An ISO IGRP NSAP address includes three separate fields for routing: the domain, area, and system ID. An IS-IS address includes two fields: a single continuous area field (comprising the domain and area fields) and the system ID. For more detailed information about ISO CLNS, see the ISO CLNS documents listed in the Related Documents. IS-IS is an ISO dynamic routing protocol. Enabling IS-IS requires that you create an IS-IS routing process and assign it to a specific interface, rather than to a network. You can specify more than one IS-IS routing process per Layer 3 switch or router by using the multiarea IS-IS configuration syntax. You then configure the parameters for each instance of the IS-IS routing process. Small IS-IS networks are built as a single area that includes all the routers in the network. As the network grows larger, it is usually reorganized into a backbone area made up of the connected set of all Level 2 routers from all areas, which is in turn connected to local areas. Within a local area, routers know how to reach all system IDs. Between areas, routers know how to reach the backbone, and the backbone routers know how to reach other areas. Routers establish Level 1 adjacencies to perform routing within a local area (station routing). Routers establish Level 2 adjacencies to perform routing between Level 1 areas (area routing). A single Cisco router can participate in routing in up to 29 areas and can perform Level 2 routing in the backbone. In general, each routing process corresponds to an area. By default, the first instance of the routing process configured performs both Level 1and Level 2 routing. You can configure additional router instances, which are automatically treated as Level 1 areas. You must configure the parameters for each instance of the IS-IS routing process individually. For IS-IS multiarea routing, you can configure only one process to perform Level 2 routing, although you can define up to 29 Level 1 areas for each Cisco unit. If Level 2 routing is configured on any process, all additional processes are automatically configured as Level 1. You can configure this process to perform Level 1 routing at the same time. If Level 2 routing is not desired for a router instance, remove the Level 2 capability using the is-type global configuration command. Use the is-type command also to configure a different router instance as a Level 2 router. This section briefly describes how to configure IS-IS routing. For more detailed information about IS-IS, see the IS-IS documents listed in the Related Documents. This section includes the following topics: ■Default IS-IS Configuration ■Nonstop Forwarding Awareness ■Configuring IS-IS Global Parameters ■Configuring IS-IS Interface Parameters
The integrated IS-IS NSF Awareness feature is supported for IPv4 in the IP services image. The feature allows customer premises equipment (CPE) routers that are NSF-aware to help NSF-capable routers perform nonstop forwarding of packets. The local router is not necessarily performing NSF, but its awareness of NSF allows the integrity and accuracy of the routing database and link-state database on the neighboring NSF-capable router to be maintained during the switchover process. This feature is automatically enabled and requires no configuration. For more information on this feature, see the “Configuring Nonstop Forwarding” chapter in the High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S. To enable IS-IS, you specify a name and NET for each routing process. You then enable IS-IS routing on the interface and specify the area for each instance of the routing process. You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring IS-IS. Define areas, prepare an addressing plan for the devices (including defining the NETs), and determine the interfaces that will run integrated IS-IS. To facilitate verification, a matrix of adjacencies should be prepared before you configure your devices, showing what neighbors should be expected in the adjacencies table.
To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis area-tag router configuration command. This example shows how to configure three routers to run conventional IS-IS as an IP routing protocol. In conventional IS-IS, all routers act as Level 1 and Level 2 routers (by default). Router A: Router B: Router C: These are some optional IS-IS global parameters that you can configure: ■You can force a default route into an IS-IS routing domain by configuring a default route controlled by a route map. You can also specify other filtering options configurable under a route map. ■You can configure the router to ignore IS-IS LSPs that are received with internal checksum errors or to purge corrupted LSPs, which causes the initiator of the LSP to regenerate it. ■You can assign passwords to areas and domains. ■You can create aggregate addresses that are represented in the routing table by a summary address (route-summarization). Routes learned from other routing protocols can also be summarized. The metric used to advertise the summary is the smallest metric of all the specific routes. ■You can set an overload bit. ■You can configure the LSP refresh interval and the maximum time that an LSP can remain in the router database without a refresh ■You can set the throttling timers for LSP generation, shortest path first computation, and partial route computation. ■You can configure the switch to generate a log message when an IS-IS adjacency changes state (up or down). ■If a link in the network has a maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of less than 1500 bytes, you can lower the LSP MTU so that routing will still occur. ■The partition avoidance router configuration command prevents an area from becoming partitioned when full connectivity is lost among a Level1-2 border router, adjacent Level 1 routers, and end hosts. Enable IS-IS routing as described in the Enabling IS-IS Routing.
To disable default route generation, use the no default-information originate router configuration command. Use the no area-password or no domain-password router configuration command to disable passwords. To disable LSP MTU settings, use the no lsp mtu router configuration command. To return to the default conditions for summary addressing, LSP refresh interval, LSP lifetime, LSP timers, SFP timers, and PRC timers, use the no form of the commands. Use the no partition avoidance router configuration command to disable the output format. You can optionally configure certain interface-specific IS-IS parameters, independently from other attached routers. However, if you change some values from the defaults, such as multipliers and time intervals, it makes sense to also change them on multiple routers and interfaces. Most of the interface parameters can be configured for level 1, level 2, or both. These are some interface level parameters you can configure: ■The default metric on the interface, which is used as a value for the IS-IS metric and assigned when there is no quality of service (QoS) routing performed. ■The hello interval (length of time between hello packets sent on the interface) or the default hello packet multiplier used on the interface to determine the hold time sent in IS-IS hello packets. The hold time determines how long a neighbor waits for another hello packet before declaring the neighbor down. This determines how quickly a failed link or neighbor is detected so that routes can be recalculated. Change the hello multiplier in circumstances where hello packets are lost frequently and IS-IS adjacencies are failing unnecessarily. You can raise the hello multiplier and lower the hello interval correspondingly to make the hello protocol more reliable without increasing the time required to detect a link failure. ■Other time intervals: –Complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) interval. CSNPs are sent by the designated router to maintain database synchronization. –Retransmission interval. This is the time between retransmission of IS-IS LSPs for point-to-point links. –IS-IS LSP retransmission throttle interval. This is the maximum rate (number of milliseconds between packets) at which IS-IS LSPs are re-sent on point-to-point links This interval is different from the retransmission interval, which is the time between successive retransmissions of the same LSP. ■Designated router election priority, which allows you to reduce the number of adjacencies required on a multiaccess network, which in turn reduces the amount of routing protocol traffic and the size of the topology database. ■The interface circuit type, which is the type of adjacency desired for neighbors on the specified interface. ■Password authentication for the interface. Enable IS-IS routing as described in the Enabling IS-IS Routing.
To return to the default settings, use the no forms of the commands. The following configuration example for an IS-IS routing process called area1 sets a global default metric of 111 for the IS-IS interfaces: You can remove all contents of a CLNS cache or remove information for a particular neighbor or route. You can display specific CLNS or IS-IS statistics, such as the contents of routing tables, caches, and databases. You can also display information about specific interfaces, filters, or neighbors.
The Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Protocol quickly detects forwarding-path failures for a variety of media types, encapsulations, topologies, and routing protocols. It operates in a unicast, point-to-point mode on top of any data protocol being forwarded between two systems to track IPv4 connectivity between directly connected neighbors. BFD packets are encapsulated in UDP packets with a destination port number of 3784 or 3785. In EIGRP, IS-IS, and OSPF deployments, the closest alternative to BFD is the use of modified failure-detection mechanisms. Although reducing the EIGRP, IS-IS, and OSPF timers can result in a failure-detection rate of 1 to 2 seconds, BFD can provide failure detection in less than 1 second. BFD can be less CPU-intensive than the reduced timers and, because it is not tied to any particular routing protocol, it can be used as a generic and consistent failure detection mechanism for multiple routing protocols. To create a BFD session, you must configure BFD on both systems (BFD peers). Enabling BFD at the interface and routing protocol level on BFD peers creates a BFD session. BFD timers are negotiated and the BFD peers send control packets to each other at the negotiated intervals. If the neighbor is not directly connected, BFD neighbor registration is rejected. Figure 104 shows a simple network with two routers running OSPF and BFD. When OSPF discovers a neighbor (1), it sends a request to the BFD process to initiate a BFD neighbor session with the neighbor OSPF router (2), establishing the BFD neighbor session (3). Figure 104 Establishing a BFD Session Figure 105 shows what happens when a failure occurs in the network (1). The BFD neighbor session with the OSPF neighbor closes (2). BFD notifies the OSPF process that the BFD neighbor is no longer reachable, and the OSPF process breaks the OSPF neighbor relationship (4). If an alternative path is available, the routers start converging on it. Figure 105 Breaking an OSPF Neighbor Relationship BFD clients are routing protocols that register neighbors with BFD. The switch supports IS-IS, OSPF v1 and v2, BGP, EIGRP, and HSRP clients. You can use one BFD session for multiple client protocols. For example, if a network is running OSPF and EIGRP across the same link to the same peer, you need to create only one BFD session, and information is shared with both routing protocols. The switch supports BFD version 0 and version 1. BFD neighbors automatically negotiate the version and the protocol always runs at the higher version. The default version is version 1. By default, BFD neighbors exchange both control packets and echo packets for detecting forwarding failures. The switch sends echo packets at the configured BFD interval rate (from 50 to 999 ms), and control packets at the BFD slow-timer rate (from 1000 to 3000 ms). Failure-rate detection can be faster in BFD echo mode, which is enabled by default when you configure BFD session. In this mode, the switch sends echo packets from the BFD software layer, and the BFD neighbor responds to the echo packets through its fast-switching layer. The echo packets do not reach the BFD neighbor software layer, but are reflected back over the forwarding path for failure detection. You configure the rate at which each BFD interface sends BFD echo packets by entering the bfd interval interface configuration command. To reduce bandwidth consumption, you can disable the sending of echo packets by entering the no bfd echo interface configuration command. When echo mode is disabled, control packets are used to detect forwarding failures. Control packets are exchanged at the configured slow-timer rate, which could result in longer failure-detection time. You configure this rate by entering the bfd slow-timer global configuration command. The range is from 1000 to 3000 ms; the default rate is every 1000 ms. You can enable or disable echo processing at a switch interface independent of the BFD neighbor configuration. Disabling echo mode only disables the sending of echo packets by the interface. The fast-switching layer that receives an echo packet always reflects it back to the sender. To run BFD on a switch, you need to configure basic BFD interval parameters on BFD interfaces, enable routing on the switch, and enable one or more one routing protocol clients for BFD. You also need to confirm that Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is enabled (the default) on participating switches. For more information on the configuration and commands, see the BFD documents listed in the Related Documents. This section includes the following topics: ■Default BFD Configuration ■Default BFD Configuration Guidelines ■Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface ■Enabling BFD Routing Protocol Clients ■No BFD sessions are configured. BFD is disabled on all interfaces. ■When configured, BFD version 1 is the default, but switches negotiate for version. Version 0 is also supported. ■Standby BFD (for HSRP) is enabled by default. ■Asynchronous BFD echo mode is enabled when a BFD session is configured. The switch supports a maximum of 28 BFD sessions at one time. ■Configure basic BFD interval parameters on each interface over which you want to run BFD sessions. ■Enable routing on the switch. You can configure BFD without enabling routing, but BFD sessions do not become active unless routing is enabled on the switch and on the BFD interfaces. ■Enable one or more one routing protocol clients for BFD. You should implement fast convergence for the routing protocol that you are using. Note: We recommend that you configure the BFD interval parameters on an interface before configuring the routing protocol commands, especially when using EIGRP. Confirm that CEF is enabled on participating switches (the default) as well as IP routing. BFD is supported on physical interfaces that are configured as routing interfaces. It is not supported on Layer 2 interfaces, pseudowires, static routes, SVI interfaces, or port channels. Although you can configure BFD interface commands on a Layer 2 port, BFD sessions do not operate on the interface unless it is configured as a Layer 3 interface (no switchport) and assigned an IP address. In HSRP BFD, standby BFD is enabled globally by default and on all interfaces. If you disable it on an interface, you then must disable and reenable it globally for BFD sessions to be active. When using BFD echo mode (the default), you should disable sending of ICMP redirect messages by entering the no ip redirects interface configuration command on the BFD interface. Before you can start a BFD session on an interface, you must put the interface into Layer 3 mode and set the baseline BFD parameters on it. Note: Although you can configure BFD on Layer 2 interfaces, a BFD session cannot start until both interfaces are in Layer 3 mode and routing is enabled on the switch. See Default BFD Configuration Guidelines.
To remove the BFD parameter configuration, enter the no bfd interval interface configuration command. After you configure BFD parameters on an interface, you can start a BFD session for one or more routing protocols. You must first enable routing by entering the ip routing global configuration command on the switch. Note that there can be more than one way to start a BFD session on an interface, depending on the routing protocol. ■Configuring BFD for OSPF ■Configuring BFD for IS-IS ■Configuring BFD for BGP ■Configuring BFD for EIGRP ■Configuring BFD for HSRP When you start BFD sessions for OSPF, OSPF must be running on all participating devices. You can enable BFD support for OSPF by enabling it globally on all OSPF interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces. ■Configure BFD parameters as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF.
To disable OSPF BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command.To disable it on an interface, enter the no ip osfp bfd or the ip ospf bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface. If you want to run OSPF BFD on only one or a few interfaces, you can enter the ip ospf bfd interface configuration command on those interfaces instead of enabling it globally. See the next procedure. Note: If you try to configure OSPF BFD on a Layer 2 interface, the configuration is not recognized. This is an example of enabling BFD for OSPF on all OSPF interfaces: ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF.
To disable OSPF BFD on an interface, enter the no ip osfp bfd or the ip ospf bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface. This is an example of enabling BFD for OSPF on a single interface: When you start BFD sessions for IS-IS, IS-IS must be running on all devices participating in BFD. You can enable BFD support for IS-IS by enabling it globally on all IS-IS interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces. ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure IS-IS as described in the Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing.
To disable IS-IS BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command. To disable it on the specified interface, enter the no isis bfd or the isis bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface. If you only want to run IS-IS BFD on a few interfaces, instead of enabling it globally, you can enter the isis bfd interface configuration command on those interfaces. See the next procedure. Note: Although IS-IS BFD operates only on Layer 3 interfaces, you can configure it on interfaces in Layer 2 or Layer 3 mode. When you enable it, you see this message: This is an example of setting fast convergence and enabling BFD for IS-IS on all IS-IS interfaces: ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure IS-IS as described in the Configuring IS-IS Dynamic Routing.
To disable IS-IS BFD on an interface, enter the no isis bfd or the isis bfd disable interface configuration command on the interface. This is an example of enabling BFD for IS-IS on a single interface: When you start BFD sessions for BGP, BGP must be running on all participating devices. You enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor to enable BFD for BGP. ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure BGP as described in the Configuring BGP.
To disable BGP BFD, enter the no neighbor ip-address fall-over bfd router configuration command. When you start BFD sessions for EIGRP, EIGRP must be running on all participating devices.You can enable BFD support for EIGRP by globally enabling it on all EIGRP interfaces or by enabling it on one or more interfaces. ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Configure EIGRP as described in the Configuring EIGRP.
To disable EIGRP BFD on all interfaces, enter the no bfd all-interfaces router configuration command. To disable it on an interface, enter the no bfd interface interface-id router configuration command. HSRP supports BFD by default; it is globally enabled on all interfaces. If HSRP support has been manually disabled, you can reenable it in interface or global configuration mode. ■Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface. ■Ensure that all participating devices have HSRP enabled and CEF enabled (the default).
To disable HSRP support for BFD on all interfaces, enter the no standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command. To disable it on an interface, enter the no standby bfd interface configuration command. Note: If you disable standby BFD on an interface by entering the no standby bfd interface configuration command, to activate BFD sessions on other interfaces, you must disable and reenable it globally by entering the no standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command followed by the standby bfd all-interfaces global configuration command. The following example shows how to reenable HSRP BFD peering if it has been disabled on a switch: When you configure a BFD session, BFD echo mode is enabled by default on BFD interfaces. You can disable echo mode on an interface so it sends no echo packets and but only sends back echo packets received from a neighbor. When echo mode is disabled, control packets are used to detect forwarding failures. You can configure slow timers to reduce the frequency of BFD control packets. Configure BFD parameters on the interface as described in the Configuring BFD Session Parameters on an Interface.
To reenable echo mode on the switch, enter the bfd echo global configuration command. The following example disables echo mode between BFD neighbors: Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) provide a secure way for customers to share bandwidth over an ISP backbone network. A VPN is a collection of sites sharing a common routing table. A customer site is connected to the service-provider network by one or more interfaces, and the service provider associates each interface with a VPN routing table, called a VPN routing/forwarding (VRF) table. The switch supports multiple VPN routing/forwarding (multi-VRF) instances in customer edge (CE) devices (multi-VRF CE). With multi-VRF CE, a service provider can support two or more VPNs with overlapping IP addresses. Note: The switch does not use Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) to support VPNs. For information about MPLS VRF, refer to the MPLS: Layer 3 VPNs Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. ■Information About Multi-VRF CE ■Default Multi-VRF CE Configuration ■Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines ■Configuring VRFs ■Configuring VRF-Aware Services ■Configuring a VPN Routing Session ■Configuring BGP PE to CE Routing Sessions ■Displaying Multi-VRF CE Status Multi-VRF CE allows a service provider to support two or more VPNs, where IP addresses can be overlapped among the VPNs. Multi-VRF CE uses input interfaces to distinguish routes for different VPNs and forms virtual packet-forwarding tables by associating one or more Layer 3 interfaces with each VRF. Interfaces in a VRF can be either physical, such as Ethernet ports, or logical, such as VLAN SVIs, but an interface cannot belong to more than one VRF at any time. Note: Multi-VRF CE interfaces must be Layer 3 interfaces. Multi-VRF CE includes these devices: ■Customer edge (CE) devices provide customers access to the service-provider network over a data link to one or more provider edge routers. The CE device advertises the site local routes to the router and learns the remote VPN routes from it. The Cisco Connected Grid switch can be a CE. ■Provider edge (PE) routers exchange routing information with CE devices by using static routing or a routing protocol such as BGP, RIPv2, OSPF, or EIGRP. The PE is only required to maintain VPN routes for those VPNs to which it is directly attached, eliminating the need for the PE to maintain all of the service-provider VPN routes. Each PE router maintains a VRF for each of its directly connected sites. Multiple interfaces on a PE router can be associated with a single VRF if all of these sites participate in the same VPN. Each VPN is mapped to a specified VRF. After learning local VPN routes from CEs, a PE router exchanges VPN routing information with other PE routers by using internal BGP (IBPG). ■Provider routers or core routers are any routers in the service provider network that do not attach to CE devices. With multi-VRF CE, multiple customers can share one CE, and only one physical link is used between the CE and the PE. The shared CE maintains separate VRF tables for each customer and switches or routes packets for each customer based on its own routing table. Multi-VRF CE extends limited PE functionality to a CE device, giving it the ability to maintain separate VRF tables to extend the privacy and security of a VPN to the branch office. Figure 106 shows a configuration using Cisco Connected Grid switches as multiple virtual CEs. This scenario is suited for customers who have low bandwidth requirements for their VPN service, for example, small companies. In this case, multi-VRF CE support is required in the Cisco Connected Grid switches. Because multi-VRF CE is a Layer 3 feature, each interface in a VRF must be a Layer 3 interface. Figure 106 Switches Acting as Multiple Virtual CEs When the CE switch receives a command to add a Layer 3 interface to a VRF, it sets up the appropriate mapping between the VLAN ID and the policy label (PL) in multi-VRF-CE-related data structures and adds the VLAN ID and PL to the VLAN database. When multi-VRF CE is configured, the Layer 3 forwarding table is conceptually partitioned into two sections: ■The multi-VRF CE routing section contains the routes from different VPNs. ■The global routing section contains routes to non-VPN networks, such as the Internet. VLAN IDs from different VRFs are mapped into different policy labels, which are used to distinguish the VRFs during processing. If no route is found in the multi-VRF CE section of the Layer 3 forwarding table, the global routing section is used to determine the forwarding path. For each new VPN route learned, the Layer 3 setup function retrieves the policy label by using the VLAN ID of the ingress port and inserts the policy label and new route to the multi-VRF CE routing section. If the packet is received from a routed port, the port internal VLAN ID number is used; if the packet is received from an SVI, the VLAN number is used. This is the packet-forwarding process in a multi-VRF-CE-enabled network: ■When the switch receives a packet from a VPN, the switch looks up the routing table based on the input policy label number. When a route is found, the switch forwards the packet to the PE. ■When the ingress PE receives a packet from the CE, it performs a VRF lookup. When a route is found, the router adds a corresponding MPLS label to the packet and sends it to the MPLS network. ■When an egress PE receives a packet from the network, it strips the label and uses the label to identify the correct VPN routing table. Then it performs the normal route lookup. When a route is found, it forwards the packet to the correct adjacency. ■When a CE receives a packet from an egress PE, it uses the input policy label to look up the correct VPN routing table. If a route is found, it forwards the packet within the VPN. To configure VRF, you create a VRF table and specify the Layer 3 interface associated with the VRF. Then configure the routing protocols in the VPN and between the CE and the PE. BGP is the preferred routing protocol used to distribute VPN routing information across the provider’s backbone. The multi-VRF CE network has three major components: ■VPN route target communities—lists of all other members of a VPN community. You need to configure VPN route targets for each VPN community member. ■Multiprotocol BGP peering of VPN community PE routers—propagates VRF reachability information to all members of a VPN community. You need to configure BGP peering in all PE routers within a VPN community. ■VPN forwarding—transports all traffic between all VPN community members across a VPN service-provider network.
These are considerations when configuring VRF in your network: ■A switch with multi-VRF CE is shared by multiple customers, and each customer has its own routing table. ■Because customers use different VRF tables, the same IP addresses can be reused. Overlapped IP addresses are allowed in different VPNs. ■Multi-VRF CE lets multiple customers share the same physical link between the PE and the CE. Trunk ports with multiple VLANs separate packets among customers. Each customer has its own VLAN. ■Multi-VRF CE does not support all MPLS-VRF functionality. It does not support label exchange, LDP adjacency, or labeled packets. ■For the PE router, there is no difference between using multi-VRF CE or using multiple CEs. In Figure 106, multiple virtual Layer 3 interfaces are connected to the multi-VRF CE device. ■The switch supports configuring VRF by using physical ports, VLAN SVIs, or a combination of both. The SVIs can be connected through an access port or a trunk port. ■A customer can use multiple VLANs as long as they do not overlap with those of other customers. A customer’s VLANs are mapped to a specific routing table ID that is used to identify the appropriate routing tables stored on the switch. ■The switch supports one global network and up to 26 VRFs. ■Most routing protocols (BGP, OSPF, RIP, EIGRP, and static routing) can be used between the CE and the PE. However, we recommend using external BGP (EBGP) for these reasons: –BGP does not require multiple algorithms to communicate with multiple CEs. –BGP is designed for passing routing information between systems run by different administrations. –BGP makes it easy to pass attributes of the routes to the CE. ■Multi-VRF CE does not affect the packet switching rate. ■If no VRFs are configured, up to 105 policies can be configured. ■If even one VRF is configured than 41 policies can be configured. ■If more than 41 policies are configured then VRF cannot be configured. ■VRF and private VLANs are mutually exclusive. You cannot enable VRF on a private VLAN. Similarly, you cannot enable private VLAN on a VLAN with VRF configured on the VLAN interface. ■VRF and policy-based routing (PBR) are mutually exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot enable VRF when PBR is enabled on an interface. In contrast, you cannot enable PBR when VRF is enabled on an interface. Follow the steps in this procedure to configure one or more VRFs. See Multi-VRF CE Configuration Guidelines.
Use the no ip vrf vrf-name global configuration command to delete a VRF and to remove all interfaces from it. Use the no ip vrf forwarding interface configuration command to remove an interface from the VRF. The following example shows how to import a route map to a VRF instance named VPN1: IP services can be configured on global interfaces, and these services run within the global routing instance. IP services are enhanced to run on multiple routing instances; they are VRF-aware. Any configured VRF in the system can be specified for a VRF-aware service. VRF-aware services are implemented in platform-independent modules. VRF means multiple routing instances in Cisco IOS. Each platform has its own limit on the number of VRFs it supports. VRF-aware services have the following characteristics: ■The user can ping a host in a user-specified VRF. ■ARP entries are learned in separate VRFs. The user can display Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) entries for specific VRFs. These services are VRF-aware: ■ARP ■Ping ■Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) ■Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) ■Syslog ■Traceroute ■FTP and TFTP Note: VRF-aware services are not supported for Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (uRPF). Use the arp command in global configuration mode to add a VRF to the ARP cache. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
To check if a configured VRF is working, you can use the ping vrf command. When attempting to ping from a provider edge (PE) router to a customer edge (CE) router, or from a PE router to PE router, the standard ping command will not usually work. The ping vrf command allows you to ping the IP addresses of LAN interfaces on CE routers. If you are on a PE router, be sure to indicate the specific VRF (VPN) name, as shown in the “Examples” section. If all required information is not provided at the command line, the system will enter the interactive dialog (extended mode) for ping. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
In the following example, the target host in the domain 209.165.201.1 is pinged (using IP/ICMP) in the context of the “CustomerA” VPN connection: Follow the steps in this procedure to configure configure VRF-aware services for SNMP. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
The following example specifies the SNMP engine ID and configures the VRF name traps-vrf for SNMP communications with the remote device at 172.16.20.3: The following example shows how to send all SNMP notifications to example.com over the VRF named trap-vrf using the community string public: Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) support for VRFs ensures that HSRP virtual IP addresses are added to the correct IP routing table. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
Follow the steps in this procedure to configure VRF-aware services for Syslog. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
The following example specifies a VRF that connects to the syslog server host: Follow the steps in this procedure to find the destination address in a VRF. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
The following example displays output of the traceroute command with the vrf keyword. Output includes the incoming VRF name/tag and the outgoing VRF name/tag. FTP and TFTP are VRF-aware, which means that file transfer is supported across an interface within a VRF instance. To specify a VRF as a source for FTP or TFTP connections, the VRF must be associated with the same interface that you configure with the ip ftp source-interface command. In this configuration, FTP looks for the destination IP address for file transfer in the specified VRF table. If the specified source interface is not up, Cisco IOS software selects the address of the interface closest to the destination as the source address.
To specify the IP address of an interface as the source address for TFTP connections, use the ip tftp source-interface show mode command. To return to the default, use the no form of this command.
The following example shows how to configure the switch to use the VRF table named vpn1 to look for the destination IP address for the transfer of FTP packets: To configure VRF-aware RADIUS, you must first enable AAA on a RADIUS server. The switch supports the ip vrf forwarding vrf-name server-group configuration and the ip radius source-interface global configuration commands. Routing within the VPN can be configured with any supported routing protocol (RIP, OSPF, EIGRP, or BGP) or with static routing. The configuration shown here is for OSPF, but the process is the same for other protocols. Note: To configure an EIGRP routing process to run within a VRF instance, you must configure an autonomous-system number by entering the autonomous-system a utonomous-system-number address-family configuration mode command. Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
Use the no router ospf process-id vrf vrf-name global configuration command to disassociate the VPN forwarding table from the OSPF routing process. This example shows a basic OSPF configuration using the router ospf command to configure OSPF VRF processes for the VRFs first, second, and third: ■Complete the BGP network strategy and planning for your network. ■Configure OSPF as described in the Configuring OSPF. ■Configure a VRF as described in the Configuring VRFs.
Use the no router bgp autonomous-system-number global configuration command to delete the BGP routing process. Use the command with keywords to delete routing characteristics. The following example configures BGP for CE to PE routing: You can use the following privileged EXEC commands to display information about multi-VRF CE configuration and status.
This section describes how to configure IP routing protocol-independent features. For a complete description of the IP routing protocol-independent commands in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference. This section includes the following topics: ■Configuring Cisco Express Forwarding ■Configuring the Number of Equal-Cost Routing Paths ■Configuring Static Unicast Routes ■Specifying Default Routes and Networks ■Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information ■Configuring Policy-Based Routing ■Filtering Routing Information ■Managing Authentication Keys Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology used to optimize network performance. CEF implements an advanced IP look-up and forwarding algorithm to deliver maximum Layer 3 switching performance. CEF is less CPU-intensive than fast switching route caching, allowing more CPU processing power to be dedicated to packet forwarding. In dynamic networks, fast switching cache entries are frequently invalidated because of routing changes, which can cause traffic to be process switched using the routing table, instead of fast switched using the route cache. CEF uses the Forwarding Information Base (FIB) lookup table to perform destination-based switching of IP packets. The two main components in CEF are the distributed FIB and the distributed adjacency tables. ■The FIB is similar to a routing table or information base and maintains a mirror image of the forwarding information in the IP routing table. When routing or topology changes occur in the network, the IP routing table is updated, and those changes are reflected in the FIB. The FIB maintains next-hop address information based on the information in the IP routing table. Because the FIB contains all known routes that exist in the routing table, CEF eliminates route cache maintenance, is more efficient for switching traffic, and is not affected by traffic patterns. ■Nodes in the network are said to be adjacent if they can reach each other with a single hop across a link layer. CEF uses adjacency tables to prepend Layer 2 addressing information. The adjacency table maintains Layer 2 next-hop addresses for all FIB entries. Because the switch uses Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) to achieve Gigabit-speed line rate IP traffic, CEF forwarding applies only to the software-forwarding path, that is, traffic that is forwarded by the CPU. CEF is enabled globally by default. If for some reason it is disabled, you can re-enable it by using the ip cef global configuration command. The default configuration is CEF enabled on all Layer 3 interfaces. Entering the no ip route-cache cef interface configuration command disables CEF for traffic that is being forwarded by software. This command does not affect the hardware forwarding path. Disabling CEF and using the debug ip packet detail privileged EXEC command can be useful to debug software-forwarded traffic. To enable CEF on an interface for the software-forwarding path, use the ip route-cache cef interface configuration command. Caution: Although the no ip route-cache cef interface configuration command to disable CEF on an interface is visible in the CLI, we strongly recommend that you do not disable CEF on interfaces except for debugging purposes. ■Cisco Express Forwarding requires a software image that includes Cisco Express Forwarding and IP routing enabled on the switch. ■If you enable Cisco Express Forwarding and then create an access list that uses the log keyword, the packets that match the access list are not Cisco Express Forwarding switched. They are process switched. Logging disables Cisco Express Forwarding.
When a router has two or more routes to the same network with the same metrics, these routes can be thought of as having an equal cost. The term parallel path is another way to see occurrences of equal-cost routes in a routing table. If a router has two or more equal-cost paths to a network, it can use them concurrently. Parallel paths provide redundancy in case of a circuit failure and also enable a router to load balance packets over the available paths for more efficient use of available bandwidth. Although the router automatically learns about and configures equal-cost routes, you can control the maximum number of parallel paths supported by an IP routing protocol in its routing table.
Use the no maximum-paths router configuration command to restore the default value. The following example shows how to allow a maximum of 16 paths to a destination in an OSPF routing process: Static unicast routes are user-defined routes that cause packets moving between a source and a destination to take a specified path. Static routes can be important if the router cannot build a route to a particular destination and are useful for specifying a gateway of last resort to which all unroutable packets are sent. The switch retains static routes until you remove them. However, you can override static routes with dynamic routing information by assigning administrative distance values. Each dynamic routing protocol has a default administrative distance, as listed in Table 2. If you want a static route to be overridden by information from a dynamic routing protocol, set the administrative distance of the static route higher than that of the dynamic protocol.
Static routes that point to an interface are advertised through RIP, IGRP, and other dynamic routing protocols, whether or not static redistribute router configuration commands were specified for those routing protocols. These static routes are advertised because static routes that point to an interface are considered in the routing table to be connected and hence lose their static nature. However, if you define a static route to an interface that is not one of the networks defined in a network command, no dynamic routing protocols advertise the route unless a redistribute static command is specified for these protocols. When an interface goes down, all static routes through that interface are removed from the IP routing table. When the software can no longer find a valid next hop for the address specified as the forwarding router's address in a static route, the static route is also removed from the IP routing table.
Use the no ip route prefix mask { address | interface } global configuration command to remove a static route. The following example shows how to choose an administrative distance of 110. In this case, packets for network 10.0.0.0 will be routed to a router at 172.31.3.4 if dynamic information with an administrative distance less than 110 is not available. A router might not be able to learn the routes to all other networks. To provide complete routing capability, you can use some routers as smart routers and give the remaining routers default routes to the smart router. (Smart routers have routing table information for the entire internetwork.) These default routes can be dynamically learned or can be configured in the individual routers. Most dynamic interior routing protocols include a mechanism for causing a smart router to generate dynamic default information that is then forwarded to other routers. If a router has a directly connected interface to the specified default network, the dynamic routing protocols running on that device generate a default route. In RIP, it advertises the pseudonetwork 0.0.0.0.s A router that is generating the default for a network also might need a default of its own. One way a router can generate its own default is to specify a static route to the network 0.0.0.0 through the appropriate device. When default information is passed through a dynamic routing protocol, no further configuration is required. The system periodically scans its routing table to choose the optimal default network as its default route. In IGRP networks, there might be several candidate networks for the system default. Cisco routers use administrative distance and metric information to set the default route or the gateway of last resort. If dynamic default information is not being passed to the system, candidates for the default route are specified with the ip default-network global configuration command. If this network appears in the routing table from any source, it is flagged as a possible choice for the default route. If the router has no interface on the default network, but does have a path to it, the network is considered as a possible candidate, and the gateway to the best default path becomes the gateway of last resort. The ip default-network command is a classful command. It is effective only if the network mask of the network that you wish to configure as a candidate route for computing the gateway of last resort matches the network mask in the Routing Information Base (RIB). For example, if you configure ip default-network 10.0.0.0, then the mask considered by the routing protocol is 10.0.0.0/8, as it is a Class A network. The gateway of last resort is set only if the RIB contains a 10.0.0.0/8 route. If you need to use the ip default-network command, ensure that the RIB contains a network route that matches the major mask of the network class.
Use the no ip default-network network number global configuration command to remove the route. The following example defines a static route to network 10.0.0.0 as the static default route: The switch can run multiple routing protocols simultaneously, and it can redistribute information from one routing protocol to another. Redistributing information from one routing protocol to another applies to all supported IP-based routing protocols. You can also conditionally control the redistribution of routes between routing domains by defining enhanced packet filters or route maps between the two domains. The match and set route-map configuration commands define the condition portion of a route map. The match command specifies that a criterion must be matched. The set command specifies an action to be taken if the routing update meets the conditions defined by the match command. Although redistribution is a protocol-independent feature, some of the match and set route-map configuration commands are specific to a particular protocol. One or more match commands and one or more set commands follow a route-map command. If there are no match commands, everything matches. If there are no set commands, nothing is done, other than the match. Therefore, you need at least one match or set command. Note: A route map with no set route-map configuration commands is sent to the CPU, which causes high CPU utilization. You can also identify route-map statements as permit or deny. If the statement is marked as a deny, the packets meeting the match criteria are sent back through the normal forwarding channels (destination-based routing). If the statement is marked as permit, set clauses are applied to packets meeting the match criteria. Packets that do not meet the match criteria are forwarded through the normal routing channel. You can use the BGP route map continue clause to execute additional entries in a route map after an entry is executed with successful match and set clauses. You can use the continue clause to configure and organize more modular policy definitions so that specific policy configurations need not be repeated within the same route map. The switch supports the continue clause for outbound policies. For more information about using the route map continue clause, see the “BGP Route-Map Continue” section in the IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. Note: Although each of Steps 3 through 14 in the following section is optional, you must enter at least one match route-map configuration command and one set route-map configuration command. You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before configuring route redistribution or policy-based routing.
To delete an entry, use the no route-map map tag global configuration command or the no match or no set route-map configuration commands. The following example shows how to redistribute Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routes with a hop count equal to 1 to Open Shortest Path First (OSPF). These routes will be redistributed to OSPF as external link-state advertisements (LSAs) with a metric of 5, metric type of Type 1, and a tag equal to 1. You can distribute routes from one routing domain into another and control route distribution. Note that the keywords in this procedure are the same as defined in the previous procedure. The metrics of one routing protocol do not necessarily translate into the metrics of another. In these situations, an artificial metric is assigned to the redistributed route. Uncontrolled exchanging of routing information between different routing protocols can create routing loops and seriously degrade network operation. If you have not defined a default redistribution metric that replaces metric conversion, some automatic metric translations occur between routing protocols: ■RIP can automatically redistribute static routes. It assigns static routes a metric of 1 (directly connected). ■Any protocol can redistribute other routing protocols if a default mode is in effect. Review the usage guidelines and additional examples for the redistribute command in the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference.
To disable redistribution, use the no form of the commands. Given the following configuration, a RIP-learned route for network 160.89.0.0 and an ISO IGRP-learned route with prefix 49.0001.0002 will be redistributed into an IS-IS Level 2 link-state PDU with metric 5: You can use policy-based routing (PBR) to configure a defined policy for traffic flows. By using PBR, you can have more control over routing by reducing the reliance on routes derived from routing protocols. PBR can specify and implement routing policies that allow or deny paths based on: ■Identity of a particular end system ■Application ■Protocol You can use PBR to provide equal-access and source-sensitive routing, routing based on interactive versus batch traffic, or routing based on dedicated links. For example, you could transfer stock records to a corporate office on a high-bandwidth, high-cost link for a short time while transmitting routine application data such as e-mail over a low-bandwidth, low-cost link. With PBR, you classify traffic using access control lists (ACLs) and then make traffic go through a different path. PBR is applied to incoming packets. All packets received on an interface with PBR enabled are passed through route maps. Based on the criteria defined in the route maps, packets are forwarded (routed) to the appropriate next hop. ■If packets do not match any route map statements, all set clauses are applied. ■If a statement is marked as permit and the packets do not match any route-map statements, the packets are sent through the normal forwarding channels, and destination-based routing is performed. ■For PBR, route-map statements marked as deny are not supported. For more information about configuring route maps, see Using Route Maps to Redistribute Routing Information. You can use standard IP ACLs to specify match criteria for a source address or extended IP ACLs to specify match criteria based on an application, a protocol type, or an end station. The process proceeds through the route map until a match is found. If no match is found, normal destination-based routing occurs. There is an implicit deny at the end of the list of match statements. If match clauses are satisfied, you can use a set clause to specify the IP addresses identifying the next hop router in the path. For details about PBR commands and keywords, see IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T . Before configuring PBR, you should be aware of this information: ■Multicast traffic is not policy-routed. PBR applies to only to unicast traffic. ■You can enable PBR on a routed port or an SVI. ■The switch does not support route-map deny statements for PBR. ■You can apply a policy route map to an EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode, but you cannot apply a policy route map to a physical interface that is a member of the EtherChannel. If you try to do so, the command is rejected. When a policy route map is applied to a physical interface, that interface cannot become a member of an EtherChannel. ■You can define a maximum of 246 IP policy route maps on the switch. ■You can define a maximum of 512 access control entries (ACEs) for PBR on the switch. ■When configuring match criteria in a route map, follow these guidelines: –Do not match ACLs that permit packets destined for a local address. PBR would forward these packets, which could cause ping or Telnet failure or route protocol flapping. –Do not match ACLs with deny ACEs. Packets that match a deny ACE are sent to the CPU, which could cause high CPU utilization. ■To use PBR, you must first enable the default template by using the sdm prefer default global configuration command. PBR is not supported with the Layer 2 template. ■VRF and PBR are mutually-exclusive on a switch interface. You cannot enable VRF when PBR is enabled on an interface. In contrast, you cannot enable PBR when VRF is enabled on an interface. ■The number of TCAM entries used by PBR depends on the route map itself, the ACLs used, and the order of the ACLs and route-map entries. ■Policy-based routing based on packet length, IP precedence and TOS, set interface, set default next hop, or set default interface are not supported. Policy maps with no valid set actions or with set action set to Don’t Fragment are not supported. By default, PBR is disabled on the switch. To enable PBR, you must create a route map that specifies the match criteria and the resulting action if all of the match clauses are met. Then, you must enable PBR for that route map on an interface. All packets arriving on the specified interface matching the match clauses are subject to PBR. PBR can be fast-switched or implemented at speeds that do not slow down the switch. Fast-switched PBR supports most match and set commands. PBR must be enabled before you enable fast-switched PBR. Fast-switched PBR is disabled by default. Packets that are generated by the switch, or local packets, are not normally policy-routed. When you globally enable local PBR on the switch, all packets that originate on the switch are subject to local PBR. Local PBR is disabled by default. See PBR Configuration Guidelines.
Use the no route-map map-tag global configuration command or the no match or no set route-map configuration commands to delete an entry. Use the no ip policy route-map map-tag interface configuration command to disable PBR on an interface. Use the no ip route-cache policy interface configuration command to disable fast-switching PBR. Use the no ip local policy route-map map-tag global configuration command to disable policy-based routing on packets originating on the switch. The following example sends packets with the destination IP address of 172.21.16.18 to a router at IP address 172.30.3.20: You can filter routing protocol information by performing the tasks described in this section. Note: When routes are redistributed between OSPF processes, no OSPF metrics are preserved. To prevent other routers on a local network from dynamically learning about routes, you can use the passive-interface router configuration command to keep routing update messages from being sent through a router interface. When you use this command in the OSPF protocol, the interface address you specify as passive appears as a stub network in the OSPF domain. OSPF routing information is neither sent nor received through the specified router interface. In networks with many interfaces, to avoid having to manually set them as passive, you can set all interfaces to be passive by default by using the passive-interface default router configuration command and manually setting interfaces where adjacencies are desired. You should know your network design and how you want traffic to flow through it before filtering routing information.
Use a network monitoring privileged EXEC command such as show ip ospf interface to verify the interfaces that you enabled as passive, or use the show ip interface privileged EXEC command to verify the interfaces that you enabled as active. To re-enable the sending of routing updates, use the no passive-interface interface-id router configuration command. The following example sends EIGRP updates to all interfaces on network 10.108.0.0 except Ethernet interface 1: The following example sets all interfaces as passive and then activates Ethernet interface 0: You can use the distribute-list router configuration command with access control lists to suppress routes from being advertised in routing updates and to prevent other routers from learning one or more routes. When used in OSPF, this feature applies to only external routes, and you cannot specify an interface name. You can also use a distribute-list router configuration command to avoid processing certain routes listed in incoming updates. (This feature does not apply to OSPF.) Configure an access list defining which networks are to be sent or received and which are to be suppressed in routing updates.
Use the no distribute-list in router configuration command to change or cancel a filter. To cancel suppression of network advertisements in updates, use the no distribute-list out router configuration command. In the following example, a prefix list and distribute list are defined to configure the BGP routing process to accept traffic from only network 10.1.1.0/24, network 192.168.1.0, and network 10.108.0.0. An inbound route refresh is initiated to activate the distribute-list. Because some routing information might be more accurate than others, you can use filtering to prioritize information coming from different sources. An administrative distance is a rating of the trustworthiness of a routing information source, such as a router or group of routers. In a large network, some routing protocols can be more reliable than others. By specifying administrative distance values, you enable the router to intelligently discriminate between sources of routing information. The router always picks the route whose routing protocol has the lowest administrative distance. Because each network has its own requirements, there are no general guidelines for assigning administrative distances. ■Always set the administrative distance from the least to the most specific network. ■Review the usage guidelines and additional examples for the distance command in the Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference.
To remove a distance definition, use the no distance router configuration command. In the following example, the routereigrp global configuration command sets up EIGRP routing in autonomous system number 109. The network router configuration commands specify EIGRP routing on networks 192.168.7.0 and 172.16.0.0. The first distance command sets the administrative distance to 90 for all routers on the Class C network 192.168.7.0. The second distance command sets the administrative distance to 120 for the router with the address 172.16.1.3. In the following example, the set distance is from the least to the most specific network: Key management is a method of controlling authentication keys used by routing protocols. Not all protocols can use key management. Authentication keys are available for EIGRP and RIP Version 2. To manage authentication keys, define a key chain, identify the keys that belong to the key chain, and specify how long each key is valid. Each key has its own key identifier (specified with the key number key chain configuration command), which is stored locally. The combination of the key identifier and the interface associated with the message uniquely identifies the authentication algorithm and Message Digest 5 (MD5) authentication key in use. You can configure multiple keys with life times. Only one authentication packet is sent, regardless of how many valid keys exist. The software examines the key numbers in order from lowest to highest, and uses the first valid key it encounters. The lifetimes allow for overlap during key changes. Note that the router must know these lifetimes. Before you manage authentication keys, you must enable authentication. See the appropriate protocol section to see how to enable authentication for that protocol.
To remove the key chain, use the no key chain name-of-chain global configuration command. The following example configures a key chain named chain1. The key named key1 will be accepted from 1:30 p.m. to 3:30 p.m. and be sent from 2:00 p.m. to 3:00 p.m. The key named key2 will be accepted from 2:30 p.m. to 4:30 p.m. and be sent from 3:00 p.m. to 4:00 p.m. The overlap allows for migration of keys or a discrepancy in the set time of the router. There is a 30-minute leeway on each side to handle time differences. You can remove all contents of a particular cache, table, or database. You can also display specific statistics.
■ Cisco IOS Master Command List, All Releases ■ IP Addressing: ARP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: RIP Command Reference ■ IP Routing: RIP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: OSPF Command Reference ■ IP Routing: OSPF Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: EIGRP Command Reference ■ IP Routing: EIGRP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: BGP Command Reference ■ IP Routing: BGP Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS ISO CLNS Command Reference ■ ISO CLNS Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: ISIS Command Reference ■ IP Routing: ISIS Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ High Availability Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15S ■ IP Routing: BFD Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Cisco IOS IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Command Reference ■ IP Routing: Protocol-Independent Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■ Internet Routing Architectures, published by Cisco Press Page 20
This chapter describes how to configure IPv6 unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as “switch.” To use this feature, the switch must be running the IP services image. To enable IPv6 routing, you must configure the switch to use a dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database management (SDM) template. See Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks. Note: For complete syntax and usage information for the commands used in this chapter, see the Cisco IOS documentation listed in the Related Documents. ■Information About IPv6 ■Prerequisites ■Guidelines and Limitations ■Default Settings ■Configuring IPv6 ■Verifying Configuration ■Configuration Example ■Related Documents IPv4 users can move to IPv6 and receive services such as end-to-end security, quality of service (QoS), and globally unique addresses. The IPv6 address space reduces the need for private addresses and Network Address Translation (NAT) processing by border routers at network edges. This section describes IPv6 implementation on the switch and includes the following topics: ■IPv6 Addresses ■Supported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features ■Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features The switch supports only IPv6 unicast addresses. It does not support site-local unicast addresses, anycast addresses, or multicast addresses. The IPv6 128-bit addresses are represented as a series of eight 16-bit hexadecimal fields separated by colons in the format: n:n:n:n:n:n:n:n. This is an example of an IPv6 address: 2031:0000:130F:0000:0000:09C0:080F:130B For easier implementation, leading zeros in each field are optional. This is the same address without leading zeros: 2031:0:130F:0:0:9C0:80F:130B You can also use two colons (::) to represent successive hexadecimal fields of zeros, but you can use this short version only once in each address: 2031:0:130F::09C0:080F:130B For more information about IPv6 address formats, address types, and the IPv6 packet header, see IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity Configuration Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T in the IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T. In the “Information About Implementing Basic Connectivity for IPv6” chapter, these sections apply to the switch: ■IPv6 Address Formats ■IPv6 Address Type: Unicast ■IPv6 Address Output Display ■Simplified IPv6 Packet Header Support on the switch includes expanded address capability, header format simplification, improved support of extensions and options, and hardware parsing of the extension header. The switch supports hop-by-hop extension header packets, which are routed or bridged in software. The switch provides IPv6 routing capability over 802.1Q trunk ports for static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6, and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Version 3 Protocol. It supports up to 16 equal-cost routes and can simultaneously forward IPv4 and IPv6 frames at line rate. Note: For more information about the IPv6 unicast routing features described in this section, see IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T and IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. ■128-Bit Unicast Addresses ■DNS for IPv6 ■Path MTU Discovery for IPv6 Unicast ■ICMPv6 ■Neighbor Discovery ■Default Router Preference ■IPv6 Stateless Autoconfiguration and Duplicate Address Detection ■IPv6 Applications ■Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks ■DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment ■Static Routes for IPv6 ■RIP for IPv6 ■OSPF for IPv6 ■EIGRP IPv6 ■Multiprotocol BGP for IPv6 ■SNMP and Syslog Over IPv6 ■HTTP(S) Over IPv6 The switch supports aggregatable global unicast addresses and link-local unicast addresses. It does not support site-local unicast addresses. ■Aggregatable global unicast addresses are IPv6 addresses from the aggregatable global unicast prefix. The address structure enables strict aggregation of routing prefixes and limits the number of routing table entries in the global routing table. These addresses are used on links that are aggregated through organizations and eventually to the Internet service provider. These addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface ID. Current global unicast address allocation uses the range of addresses that start with binary value 001 (2000::/3). Addresses with a prefix of 2000::/3(001) through E000::/3(111) must have 64-bit interface identifiers in the extended unique identifier (EUI)-64 format. ■Link local unicast addresses can be automatically configured on any interface by using the link-local prefix FE80::/10(1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the modified EUI format. Link-local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) and the stateless autoconfiguration process. Nodes on a local link use link-local addresses and do not require globally unique addresses to communicate. IPv6 routers do not forward packets with link-local source or destination addresses to other links. IPv6 supports Domain Name System (DNS) record types in the DNS name-to-address and address-to-name lookup processes. The DNS AAAA resource record types support IPv6 addresses and are equivalent to an A address record in IPv4. The switch supports DNS resolution for IPv4 and IPv6. The switch supports advertising the system maximum transmission unit (MTU) to IPv6 nodes and path MTU discovery. Path MTU discovery allows a host to dynamically discover and adjust to differences in the MTU size of every link along a given data path. In IPv6, if a link along the path is not large enough to accommodate the packet size, the source of the packet handles the fragmentation. The switch does not support path MTU discovery for multicast packets. The Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) in IPv6 generates error messages, such as ICMP destination unreachable messages, to report errors during processing and other diagnostic functions. In IPv6, ICMP packets are also used in the neighbor discovery protocol and path MTU discovery. The switch supports NDP for IPv6, a protocol running on top of ICMPv6, and static neighbor entries for IPv6 stations that do not support NDP. The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited-node multicast addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network (local link), to verify the reachability of the neighbor, and to keep track of neighboring routers. The switch supports ICMPv6 redirect for routes with mask lengths less than 64 bits. ICMP redirect is not supported for host routes or for summarized routes with mask lengths greater than 64 bits. Neighbor discovery throttling ensures that the switch CPU is not unnecessarily burdened while it is in the process of obtaining the next hop forwarding information to route an IPv6 packet. The switch drops any additional IPv6 packets whose next hop is the same neighbor that the switch is actively trying to resolve. This drop avoids further load on the CPU. The switch supports IPv6 default router preference (DRP), an extension in router advertisement messages. DRP improves the ability of a host to select an appropriate router, especially when the host is multihomed and the routers are on different links. The switch does not support the Route Information Option in RFC 4191. An IPv6 host maintains a default router list from which it selects a router for traffic to offlink destinations. The selected router for a destination is then cached in the destination cache. NDP for IPv6 specifies that routers that are reachable or probably reachable are preferred over routers whose reachability is unknown or suspect. For reachable or probably reachable routers, NDP can either select the same router every time or cycle through the router list. By using DRP, you can configure an IPv6 host to prefer one router over another, provided both are reachable or probably reachable. The switch uses stateless autoconfiguration to manage link, subnet, and site addressing changes, such as management of host and mobile IP addresses. A host autonomously configures its own link-local address, and booting nodes send router solicitations to request router advertisements for configuring interfaces. ■Ping, traceroute, Telnet, TFTP, and FTP ■Secure Shell (SSH) over an IPv6 transport ■HTTP server access over IPv6 transport ■DNS resolver for AAAA over IPv4 transport ■Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) support for IPv6 addresses You must use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template to allocate hardware memory usage to both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Support on an Interface shows a router forwarding both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic through the same interface, based on the IP packet and destination addresses. Figure 107 Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Support on an Interface Use the dual IPv4 and IPv6 switch database management (SDM) template to enable IPv6 routing dual stack environments (supporting both IPv4 and IPv6). ■If you try to configure IPv6 without first selecting a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, a warning message appears. ■In IPv4-only environments, the switch routes IPv4 packets and applies IPv4 QoS and ACLs in hardware. IPv6 packets are not supported. ■In dual IPv4 and IPv6 environments, the switch routes both IPv4 and IPv6 packets and applies IPv4 QoS in hardware. ■IPv6 QoS is not supported. ■If you do not plan to use IPv6, do not use the dual stack template because it results in less hardware memory availability for each resource. DHCPv6 enables DHCP servers to pass configuration parameters, such as IPv6 network addresses, to IPv6 clients. The address assignment feature manages nonduplicate address assignment in the correct prefix based on the network where the host is connected. Assigned addresses can be from one or multiple prefix pools. Additional options, such as default domain and DNS name-server address, can be passed back to the client. Address pools can be assigned for use on a specific interface, on multiple interfaces, or the server can automatically find the appropriate pool. Static routes are manually configured and define an explicit route between two networking devices. Static routes are useful for smaller networks with only one path to an outside network or to provide security for certain types of traffic in a larger network. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6 is a distance-vector protocol that uses hop count as a routing metric. It includes support for IPv6 addresses and prefixes and the all-RIP-routers multicast group address FF02::9 as the destination address for RIP update messages. The switch supports Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) for IPv6, a link-state protocol for IP. The switch supports Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) for IPv6. It is configured on the interfaces on which it runs and does not require a global IPv6 address. Before running, an instance of EIGRP IPv6 requires an implicit or explicit router ID. An implicit router ID is derived from a local IPv4 address, so any IPv4 node always has an available router ID. However, EIGRP IPv6 might be running in a network with only IPv6 nodes and therefore might not have an available IPv4 router ID. Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is the supported exterior gateway protocol for IPv6. Multiprotocol BGP extensions for IPv6 support the same features and functionality as IPv4 BGP. IPv6 enhancements to multiprotocol BGP include support for IPv6 address family and network layer reachability information (NLRI) and next-hop (the next router in the path to the destination) attributes that use IPv6 addresses. The switch does not support multicast BGP or non-stop forwarding (NSF) for IPv6 or for BGP IPv6. To support both IPv4 and IPv6, IPv6 network management requires both IPv6 and IPv4 transports. Syslog over IPv6 supports address data types for these transports. SNMP and syslog over IPv6 provide these features: ■Support for both IPv4 and IPv6 ■IPv6 transport for SNMP and to modify the SNMP agent to support traps for an IPv6 host ■SNMP- and syslog-related MIBs to support IPv6 addressing ■Configuration of IPv6 hosts as trap receivers For support over IPv6, SNMP modifies the existing IP transport mapping to simultaneously support IPv4 and IPv6. These SNMP actions support IPv6 transport management: ■Opens User Datagram Protocol (UDP) SNMP socket with default settings ■Provides a new transport mechanism called SR_IPV6_TRANSPORT ■Sends SNMP notifications over IPv6 transport ■Supports SNMP-named access lists for IPv6 transport ■Supports SNMP proxy forwarding using IPv6 transport ■Verifies SNMP Manager feature works with IPv6 transport The HTTP client sends requests to both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP servers, which respond to requests from both IPv4 and IPv6 HTTP clients. URLs with literal IPv6 addresses must be specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons. The accept socket call chooses an IPv4 or IPv6 address family. The accept socket is either an IPv4 or IPv6 socket. The listening socket waits for both IPv4 and IPv6 signals that indicate a connection. The IPv6 listening socket is bound to an IPv6 wildcard address. The underlying TCP/IP stack supports a dual-stack environment. HTTP relies on the TCP/IP stack and the sockets for processing network-layer interactions. Basic network connectivity (ping) must exist between the client and the server hosts before HTTP connections can be made. ■IPv6 policy-based routing ■IPv6 virtual private network (VPN) routing and forwarding (VRF) table support ■Support for Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing ■IPv6 packets destined to site-local addresses ■Tunneling protocols, such as IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4 ■The switch as a tunnel endpoint supporting IPv4-to-IPv6 or IPv6-to-IPv4 tunneling protocols ■IPv6 unicast reverse-path forwarding ■IPv6 general prefixes ■HSRP for IPv6 Select a dual IPv4 and IPv6 template as described in the Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks. Because IPv6 is implemented in switch hardware, some limitations occur due to the IPv6 compressed addresses in the hardware memory. This results in some loss of functionality and some feature limitations. ■When using user-network interface (UNI) or enhanced network interface (ENI) ports for any IPv6-related features, you must first globally enable IP routing and IPv6 routing on the switch by entering the ip routing and ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration commands even if you are not using IPv6 routing. ■ICMPv6 redirect functionality is not supported for IPv6 host routes (routes used to reach a specific host) or for IPv6 routes with masks greater than 64 bits. The switch cannot redirect hosts to a better first-hop router for a specific destination that is reachable through a host route or through a route with masks greater than 64 bits. ■Load balancing using equal cost and unequal cost routes is not supported for IPv6 host routes or for IPv6 routes with a mask greater than 64 bits. ■The switch cannot forward SNAP-encapsulated IPv6 packets. ■The switch routes IPv6-to-IPv4 and IPv4-to-IPv6 packets in hardware, but the switch cannot be an IPv6-to-IPv4 or IPv4-to-IPv6 tunnel endpoint. ■Bridged IPv6 packets with hop-by-hop extension headers are forwarded in software. In IPv4, these packets are routed in software but bridged in hardware. ■In addition to the normal SPAN and RSPAN limitations defined in the software configuration guide, these limitations are specific to IPv6 packets: –When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the source MAC address in the SPAN output packet might be incorrect. –When you send RSPAN IPv6-routed packets, the destination MAC address might be incorrect. Normal traffic is not affected. ■The switch cannot apply QoS classification or policy-based routing on source-routed IPv6 packets in hardware. ■The switch cannot generate ICMPv6 Packet Too Big messages for multicast packets.
■Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing ■Configuring Default Router Preference ■Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 Protocol Stacks ■Configuring DHCP for IPv6 Address Assignment ■Configuring IPv6 ICMP Rate Limiting ■Configuring CEF for IPv6 ■Configuring Static Routing for IPv6 ■Configuring RIP for IPv6 ■Configuring OSPF for IPv6 ■Configuring EIGRP for IPv6 ■Configuring BGP for IPv6 To forward IPv6 traffic on an interface, you must configure a global IPv6 address on that interface. Configuring an IPv6 address on an interface automatically configures a link-local address and activates IPv6 for the interface. The configured interface automatically joins these required multicast groups for that link: ■solicited-node multicast group FF02:0:0:0:0:1:ff00::/104 for each unicast address assigned to the interface (the address for the neighbor discovery process) ■all-nodes link-local multicast group FF02::1 ■all-routers link-local multicast group FF02::2 For more information about configuring IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Addressing and Basic Connectivity for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. ■Be sure to select a dual IPv4 and IPv6 SDM template. ■Not all features discussed in this chapter are supported by the switch. See Unsupported IPv6 Unicast Routing Features. ■In the ipv6 address interface configuration command, you must enter the ipv6-address and ipv6-prefix variables with the address specified in hexadecimal using 16-bit values between colons. The prefix-length variable (preceded by a slash [/]) is a decimal value that shows how many of the high-order contiguous bits of the address comprise the prefix (the network portion of the address).
To remove an IPv6 address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 or no ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually configured IPv6 addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command without arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured with an IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command. To globally disable IPv6 routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. This example shows how to enable IPv6 with both a link-local address and a global address based on the IPv6 prefix 2001:0DB8:c18:1::/64. The EUI-64 interface ID is used in the low-order 64 bits of both addresses. Output from the show ipv6 interface EXEC command is included to show how the interface ID (20B:46FF:FE2F:D940) is appended to the link-local prefix FE80::/64 of the interface. Router advertisement messages are sent with the default router preference (DRP) configured by the ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command. If no DRP is configured, router advertisements are sent with a medium preference. A DRP is useful when two routers on a link might provide equivalent, but not equal-cost routing, and policy might dictate that hosts should prefer one of the routers. Complete the Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing.
Use the no ipv6 nd router-preference interface configuration command to disable an IPv6 DRP. This example shows how to configure a DRP of high for the router on an interface: Follow this procedure to configure a Layer 3 interface to support both IPv4 and IPv6 and to enable IPv6 routing. Before configuring IPv6 routing, you must select an SDM template that supports IPv4 and IPv6. If not already configured, use the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 { default | routing | vlan} global configuration command to configure a template that supports IPv6. When you select a new template, you must reload the switch by using the reload privileged EXEC command so that the template takes effect.
To disable IPv4 routing, use the no ip routing global configuration command. To disable IPv6 routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. To remove an IPv4 address from an interface, use the no ip address ip-address mask interface configuration command. To remove an IPv6 address from an interface, use the no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix length eui-64 or no ipv6 address ipv6-address link-local interface configuration command. To remove all manually configured IPv6 addresses from an interface, use the no ipv6 address interface configuration command without arguments. To disable IPv6 processing on an interface that has not been explicitly configured with an IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 enable interface configuration command. This example shows how to enable IPv4 and IPv6 routing on an interface: This document describes only the DHCPv6 address assignment. For more information about configuring the DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent functions, see the “Implementing DHCP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. ■Default DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration ■DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines ■Enabling the DHCPv6 Server Function ■Enabling the DHCPv6 Client Function By default, no Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) features are configured on the switch. When configuring a DHCPv6 address assignment, consider these guidelines: ■In the procedures, the specified interface must be one of these Layer 3 interfaces: –DHCPv6 IPv6 routing must be enabled on a Layer 3 interface. –SVI: a VLAN interface created by using the interface vlan vlan_id command. –EtherChannel port channel in Layer 3 mode: a port-channel logical interface created by using the interface port-channel port-channel-number command. ■Before configuring DHCPv6, you must select a Switch Database Management (SDM) template that supports IPv4 and IPv6. ■The switch can act as a DHCPv6 client, server, or relay agent. The DHCPv6 client, server, and relay function are mutually exclusive on an interface. See DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines.
To delete a DHCPv6 pool, use the no ipv6 dhcp pool poolname global configuration command. Use the no form of the DHCP pool configuration mode commands to change the DHCPv6 pool characteristics. To disable the DHCPv6 server function on an interface, use the no ipv6 dhcp server interface configuration command. This example shows how to configure a pool called engineering with an IPv6 address prefix: This example shows how to configure a pool called testgroup with three link-addresses and an IPv6 address prefix: This example shows how to configure a pool called 350 with vendor-specific options: See DHCPv6 Address Assignment Configuration Guidelines.
To disable the DHCPv6 client function, use the no ipv6 address dhcp interface configuration command. To remove the DHCPv6 client request, use the no ipv6 address dhcp client request interface configuration command. This example shows how to acquire an IPv6 address and to enable the rapid-commit option: ICMP rate limiting is enabled by default with a default interval between error messages of 100 milliseconds and a bucket size (maximum number of tokens to be stored in a bucket) of 10. Complete the Configuring IPv6 Addressing and Enabling IPv6 Routing.
To return to the default configuration, use the no ipv6 icmp error-interval global configuration command. This example shows how to configure an IPv6 ICMP error message interval of 50 milliseconds and a bucket size of 20 tokens: Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) is a Layer 3 IP switching technology, allowing more CPU processing power to be dedicated to packet forwarding. IPv4 CEF is enabled by default. IPv6 CEF is disabled by default, but automatically enabled when you configure IPv6 routing. To route IPv6 unicast packets, first globally configure forwarding of IPv6 unicast packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. You must also configure an IPv6 address and IPv6 processing on an interface by using the ipv6 address interface configuration command. To disable IPv6 CEF, use the no ipv6 cef global configuration command. To reenable IPv6 CEF, use the ipv6 cef global configuration command. You can verify the IPv6 state by entering the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command. For more information about configuring CEF, see the “Implementing IPv6 Addressing and Basic Connectivity” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. Before configuring a static IPv6 route, you must: ■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command. ■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. ■Enable IPv6 on at least one Layer 3 interface by configuring an IPv6 address on the interface.
To remove a configured static route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix length { ipv6-address | interface-id [ ipv6-address ]} [ administrative distance ] global configuration command. For more information about configuring static IPv6 routing, see the “Implementing Static Routes for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. This example shows how to configure a floating static route to an interface. The route has an administrative distance of 130: Before configuring the switch to run IPv6 RIP, you must: ■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command. ■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. ■Enable IPv6 on any Layer 3 interfaces on which IPv6 RIP is to be enabled.
To disable a RIP routing process, use the no ipv6 router rip name global configuration command. To disable the RIP routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 rip name interface configuration command. For more information about configuring RIP routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing RIP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. This example shows how to enable the RIP routing process cisco with a maximum of eight equal-cost routes and to enable it on an interface: You can customize OSPF for IPv6 for your network. However, the defaults are set to meet the requirements of most customers and features. Be careful when changing the defaults for IPv6 commands. Doing so might adversely affect OSPF for the IPv6 network. Before you enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface, you must: ■Enable routing by using the ip routing global configuration command. ■Enable the forwarding of IPv6 packets by using the ipv6 unicast-routing global configuration command. ■Enable IPv6 on Layer 3 interfaces on which you are enabling IPv6 OSPF.
To disable an OSPF routing process, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id global configuration command. To disable the OSPF routing process for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id interface configuration command. For more information about configuring OSPF routing for IPv6, see the “Implementing OSPF for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. By default, EIGRP for IPv6 is disabled. You can configure EIGRP for IPv6 on an interface. After configuring the router and the interface for EIGRP, enter the no shutdown privileged EXEC command to start EIGRP. Note: If EIGRP for IPv6 is not in shutdown mode, EIGRP might start running before you enter the EIRGP router-mode commands to configure the router and the interface. To set an explicit router ID, use the show ipv6 eigrp command to see the configured router IDs, and then use the router-id command. As with EIGRP IPv4, you can use EIGRPv6 to specify your EIGRP IPv4 interfaces and to select a subset of those as passive interfaces. Use the passive-interface default command to make all interfaces passive, and then use the no passive-interface command on selected interfaces to make them active. EIGRP IPv6 does not need to be configured on a passive interface. For more configuration procedures, see the “Implementing EIGRP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. When configuring multiprotocol BGP extensions for IPv6, you must create the BGP routing process, configure peering relationships, and customize BGP for your particular network. Note that BGP functions the same in IPv6 as in IPv4. Before configuring the router to run BGP for IPv6, you must use the ipv6 unicast-routing command to globally enable IPv6 routing.
For more configuration procedures, see the “Implementing Multiprotocol BGP for IPv6” chapter in the IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T. The switch does not support multicast IPv6 BGP, nonstop forwarding (NSF) for IPv6 BGP, 6PE multipath (EoMPLS), or IPv6 VRF.
This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 interface privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 cef privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 protocols privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 rip privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 neighbor privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 static privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 route privileged EXEC command: This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 traffic privileged EXEC command. For information about how Cisco Systems implements IPv6: ■ http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps6553/products_ios_technology_home.html For information about IPv6 and other features in this chapter: ■ IPv6 Configuration Library, Cisco IOS Release 15M&T ■IPv6 Implementation Guide, Cisco IOS Release 15.2M&T Page 21
This document describes how to configure unicast routing on the Cisco Industrial Ethernet Switches, hereafter referred to as switch. To use unicast routing, the switch must be running the IP services image. This chapter provides an overview of the following unicast routing features: ■IPv4 Unicast Routing ■IPv6 Unicast Routing ■Enhanced Object Tracking Routers and Layer 3 switches can route packets in the following ways: ■By using default routing—sending traffic with a destination unknown to the router to a default outlet or destination. ■By using preprogrammed static routes for the traffic Static unicast routing forwards packets from predetermined ports through a single path into and out of a network. Static routing does not automatically respond to changes in the network and therefore, might result in unreachable destinations. ■By dynamically calculating routes by using a routing protocol Dynamic routing protocols are used by routers to dynamically calculate the best route for forwarding traffic. Routing protocols supported by the switch are Routing Information Protocol (RIP), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, Enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS), and Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). IPv4 users can move to IPv6 and receive services such as end-to-end security, quality of service (QoS), and globally unique addresses. The IPv6 address space reduces the need for private addresses and Network Address Translation (NAT) processing by border routers at network edges. IPv6 unicast routing support on the switch includes expanded address capability, header format simplification, improved support of extensions and options, and hardware parsing of the extension header. The switch supports hop-by-hop extension header packets, which are routed or bridged in software. The switch provides IPv6 routing capability over 802.1Q trunk ports for static routes, Routing Information Protocol (RIP) for IPv6, and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Version 3 Protocol. It supports up to 16 equal-cost routes and can simultaneously forward IPv4 and IPv6 frames at line rate. Enhanced object tracking on the switch provides a more complete alternative to the Hot Standby Routing Protocol (HSRP) tracking mechanism, which allows you to track the line-protocol state of an interface. If the line protocol state of an interface goes down, the HSRP priority of the interface is reduced and another HSRP device with a higher priority becomes active. The enhanced object tracking feature separates the tracking mechanism from HSRP and creates a separate, standalone tracking process that can be used by processes other than HSRP. This allows tracking other objects in addition to the interface line-protocol state. A client process, such as HSRP or Gateway Local Balancing Protocol (GLBP), can register an interest in tracking objects and request notification when the tracked object changes state.This feature increases the availability and speed of recovery of a routing system and decreases outages and outage duration. Page 22
Cisco Industrial Ethernet switches supports Ethernet CFM. Ethernet CFM is an end-to-end per-service-instance (per VLAN) Ethernet layer OAM protocol that includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation. End-to-end can be provider-edge-to-provider-edge (PE-to-PE) device or customer-edge-to-customer-edge (CE-to-CE) device. Ethernet CFM, as specified by 802.1ag, is the standard for Layer 2 ping, Layer 2 traceroute, and end-to-end connectivity check of the Ethernet network. For complete command and configuration information for Ethernet CFM, see the Configuring Ethernet OAM, CFM, and E-LMI chapter of the System Management guide at this URL: Page 23This chapter describes the Dying-Gasp feature for the Cisco Industrial Ethernet series switches. Dying Gasp resides on a hardware component on the High-performance WAN Interface Card (HWIC) and supports Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The networking devices rely on a temporary back-up power supply on a capacitor, that allows for a graceful shutdown and the generation of the dying-gasp message. This temporary power supply is designed to last from 10 to 20 milliseconds to perform these tasks. Dying-Gasp packets are created when you configure the host by using the dying-gasp configuration command. The show dying-gasp packets command displays the detailed information about the created packets. The SNMP server for the SNMP Dying Gasp message is specified through the snmp-server host configuration command. The syslog server sending the syslog Dying Gasp message is specified through the logging host hostname-or-ipaddress transport udp command. The Ethernet-OAM Dying Gasp packets are created for interfaces where Ethernet-OAM is enabled. Dying Gasp packets can be sent to a maximum number of 5 servers for each notification type. For more information about configuring Dying Gasp, see the Configuring Dying Gasp chapter of the System Management guide at this URL: |